198
Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 1 OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS FOR LAS POSITAS COLLEGE NEW CLASSROOM BUILDING DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS AND FORMS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER CONTRACTING FORMS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER GENERAL CONDITIONS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements SECTION 01 31 14 Additional Requirements for DSA Reviewed Projects PART 1 –General: 1. Section Includes: a. Additional requirements for projects reviewed by the Division of the State Architect (DSA). b. DSA Deferred Approvals. c. DSA Incremental Submittals. d. DSA Forms: DSA-6 and DSA-103 PART 2 – Products: Not Used. PART 3 – Execution: Not Used. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 56 19 Temporary Noise Barriers

Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

  • Upload
    lytuyen

  • View
    230

  • Download
    5

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 1

OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

LAS POSITAS COLLEGE NEW CLASSROOM BUILDING

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS AND FORMS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER

CONTRACTING FORMS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER

GENERAL CONDITIONS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS – TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures Section 01 30 00 Administrative Requirements

SECTION 01 31 14 Additional Requirements for DSA Reviewed Projects PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes:

a. Additional requirements for projects reviewed by the Division of the State Architect (DSA).

b. DSA Deferred Approvals.

c. DSA Incremental Submittals.

d. DSA Forms: DSA-6 and DSA-103

PART 2 – Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 56 19 Temporary Noise Barriers

Page 2: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 2

SECTION 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection – Section attached at the end

SECTION 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion, Sediment and Storm Water Pollution Controls PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes:

a. Construction erosion and sediment control.

b. Storm water pollution prevention and control related to construction activities.

PART 2 – Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching

SECTION 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Special requirements for waste management during demolition and construction operations including salvaging, recycling and disposing of nonhazardous waste.

2. LEED Contribution: Project goal is to recycle, salvage, or reuse amount of the waste generated that may otherwise be disposed in a solid waste disposal facility (landfill) as required for achievement of LEED Credit MR2 goals.

PART 2 – Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: General requirements and procedures for compliance with certain U.S. Green Building Council's (USGBC) LEED® prerequisites and credits needed for the Project to obtain Silver certification based on LEED®- BD+C, Version 3.0.

2. LEED Information: LEED®- BD+C, Registered Project Checklist at the end of this Section provides LEED® Prerequisite, Credit and point information for use in this Project.

PART 2 – Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 3: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 3

SECTION 01 81 19 Indoor Air Quality Requirements

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Construction indoor air quality management plan, HVAC protection, construction sequencing to control emissions, building flush-out, independent materials testing, and baseline indoor air quality testing.

2. General requirements and procedures for compliance with certain U.S. Green Building Council's (USGBC) LEED® prerequisites and credits related to indoor air quality as required for the Project to obtain Gold certification based on LEED- BD+C, Version 3.0.

PART 2 –Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 01 91 00 Commissioning

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Building systems commissioning procedures and requirements for achievement of LEED Silver Certification

PART 2 –Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used. DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 30 00 Subsurface Investigation

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Geotechnical Engineering Report.

2. A Geotechnical Engineer/Testing Laboratory will be selected and paid by Owner to observe performance of work in connection with excavating, trenching, placing of compacted fill and backfilling operations and provide inspection services at the conclusion of the excavations.

PART 2 – Products: Not Used.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 02 41 14 Site Utility Demolition – Section attached at the end

Page 4: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 4

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE SECTION 03 11 00 Concrete Forming

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR5 for regional materials and MR 7 for FSC-certified wood products.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Plywood for exposed concrete; 5/8 inch minimum thickness, phenolic-faced plywood, conforming to PS 1 APA HDO Plyform Class II or better.

2. Plywood for un-exposed concrete; 5/8 inch minimum thickness, conforming to PS 1 APA B-B Plyform Class II or better.

3. Tempered concrete form hardboard conforming to AHA A135.4.

4. Lumber.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Steel reinforcement and accessories for concrete.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Reinforcing steel, ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60, low-alloy deformed steel bars.

2. Welded wire fabric, ASTM A185; 65 ksi minimum yield strength; fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets (rolled fabric not permitted); size 6 x 6 – W1.4 x W1.4.

3. Tie Wire: ASTM A497/A497M; double annealed steel wire; No. 16 gage.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete, underslab vapor retarder, and expansion joints.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Cement, ASTM C150, Type II, low-alkali.

Page 5: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 5

2. Supplementary cementitious materials, fly ash and blast-furnace slag, free of silica fume and natural pozzolans.

3. Fine and coarse aggregates, ASTM C33.

4. Admixtures, air-entraining, water reducing, shrinkage reducing, set retaring/accelerating, ASTM C494/C494M; curing compounds and materials.

5. Underslab vapor retarder; Perminator™ 15 mil Underslab Vapor Mat by W.R. Meadows, Inc.

6. Expansion joints; joint-filler strips, ASTM D1751.

7. Penetrating sealer; Euco Diamond Hard by The Euclid Chemical Co. or accepted equal.

8. Water Stops: Bentonite and rubber product, suitable for sealing construction joints.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Bentoject by De Neef Construction Chemicals, Inc., Houston, TX; 800-732-0166, www.deneef.com.

9. Concrete Strength:3,000 psi at 56 days, except 3,500 psi for site concrete.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 03 35 19 Colored Concrete Finishing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Color hardener, stamping and imprinting, chemical staining and sealer.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Color Hardener: Streak-free, powdered, cementitious material containing hard aggregates; Lithochrome by L.M. Scofield Company.

2. Stamping/imprinting tools: Manufactured from premium-quality polyurethane materials; Lithotex Pavecrafters by L.M. Scofield Company.

3. Bond breakers: Lithochrome Antiquing Release and Lithotex Liquid Release by L.M. Scofield Company.

4. Chemical Stain: Acidic, water-based solution of metallic salts that penetrate and react with chemicals in cured concrete to produce insoluable color deposits in the concrete matrix. The formulation shall contain no pigments or resins; Lithochrome Chemstain by L.M. Scofield Company.

5. Sealer: Semi-gloss, water-based, modified methyl-methacrylate emulsion; Cementone Clear Sealer by L.M. Scofield Company.

6. Joint sealer: Lithoseal Trafficalk-3G by L.M. Scofield Company.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 03 35 43.16 Dyed and Polished Concrete Finishing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Concrete grinding, dying, polishing and sealer/hardener treatment, concrete sealer treatment.

Page 6: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 6

PART 2 – Products:

1. Concrete Dyes: AmeriPolish Dye distributed by RetroPlate System.

2. Concrete Polishing and Sealer/Hardener Treatment: Retro Plate 99 by Advanced Floor Products.

3. Concrete Sealer: Retro Guard as manufactured by Advanced Floor Products.

4. Floor Protection: The System with EZ Cover as manufactured by McTech group, Inc.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY – NOT USED DIVISION 05 – METALS SECTION 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Structural steel framing and support members, base plates, grouting under base plates.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A992 Grade 50 for wide flange and WT shapes. ASTM A36/A36M for plates, channels, angles and all other shapes.

2. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B.

4. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563, Grade A, hex nuts, ASTM A325N, Type 1, with ASTM A563, Grade C, heavy hex nuts; ASTM F1852, Type 1 twist-off type tension control bolts; anchor bolts, ASTM F1554, grade as indicated on Drawings.

5. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. Filler metal shall be classified as low hydrogen and shall have a minimum Charpy V-notch toughness of 20 ft-lbs at minus 20 degrees F, as determined by AWS Classification or manufacturer certification.

6. Circular Washers for Common Bolts: ASTM F844, Type A, and ANSI B18.22.1.

7. Beveled Washers for Common Bolts: ANSI B18.23.1.

8. Washers for High Strength Bolts: Direct tension indicator. ASTM F959 hardened circular, beveled and clipped, ASTM F436.

9. Steel Shop and Touch-up Primer: Ferrous metal primers as specified in Section 09 91 00 or accepted equal.

10. Galvanized Steel Shop and Touch-up Primer: Galvanized metal primers as specified in Section 09 91 00 or accepted equal.

11. Mechanical, Expansion and Chemical Anchors: ICC approved by Hilti.

Page 7: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 7

12. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.

13. Welded Headed Stud Anchors: ASTM A108. Welding, testing and inspection shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1-94 and CBC 2231A.5.

14. Weld Filler Material: All weld filler material shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70 KSI per AWS D1.1, latest edition approved by code enforcement agency.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Architecturally exposed structural steel (AESS) framing.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as architecturally exposed structural steel.

a. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness.

b. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning, treating, and shop priming.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 31 00 Steel Decking

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Steel decking and accessories, framing for openings up to and including 24 inches.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, SS designation, Grade 33 (minimum yield 38 KSI); zinc coated conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, G60. Refer to Drawings for types and sizes of steel decking.

2. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and D1.3.

3. Shop and Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC – Paint 20 Type II Organic zinc rich.

4. Steel Decking and Design: Steel decking shall be metallic coated with interlocking side lap. Deck types and minimum structural properties shall be

Page 8: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 8

as indicated on Drawings. Submit ICC Reports that demonstrate compliance with design requirements.

5. Sump pans, ridge plates, valley plates, transition plates, and eave plates shall be provided per manufacturer’s standards.

6. Welded Headed Studs: ASTM A108. Welding, testing and inspection shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 and CBC 2231A.5.

7. Acoustical Deck: Epicore-A by Epic Metals Corporation. Acoustical deck to have factory-applied paint finish.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Load bearing formed steel stud exterior wall framing, ceiling joists.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Studs, Zees, Angles and Plates: ASTM A653/A653M; Grade 33 for 18 gauge and lighter, and Grade 50, Class 1 for 16 Gauge and heavier.

2. Joists: ASTM A653/A653M Grade A sheet steel, formed to channel shape, punched web.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal fabrications.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M and A572/A572M.

2. Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

3. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

4. Mechanical Tubing: ASTM A513, MT1010, Type 5, drawn over mandrel (DOM).

5. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M.

6. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 9: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 9

SECTION 05 51 00 Metal Stairs

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Steel stair frame of structural sections, treads, landings and closed risers, guardrails and handrails.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Structural Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M.

2. Hot-rolled Carbon Steel Sheets and Strips: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A and ASTM A500 Grade B

4. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500 Grade B.

5. Sheet Steel: ASTM 653/653M, Grade B Structural Quality with 1.25 oz./square foot galvanized coating.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 73 00 Decorative Metal Railings

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Aluminum pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Rails: 1-1/2 inch diameter, Schedule 40, extruded tubing. Permanently anchored. Fabricate from anodized aluminum, 6063-T52 tube; Connectorail System by Julius Blum & Company.

2. Fittings: Wrought material of aluminum. Fittings fabricated from more than one piece shall be of welded construction with no weld marks visible when the fitting is installed; Connectorail System by Julius Blum & Company..

3. Connector Sleeves: Internal connector sleeves shall be of extruded aluminum; Connectorail System by Julius Blum & Company..

4. Splice Joints: Secured by internal connector sleeves with the use of epoxy adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.

5. Exposed Fasteners: 3/8 inch stainless steel machine screws.

6. Handrail Brackets: Aluminum; Connectorail System by Julius Blum & Company.

7. Finish: Mill finish aluminum.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 10: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 10

DIVISION 06 – WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

SECTION 06 16 00 Sheathing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Wall sheathing, roof sheathing, subflooring, underlayment, building wrap (weather-resistive barrier), and flashing.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR5 for regional materials and MR7 for FSC-Certified wood.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credits EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants and EQ 4.4 for composite wood products.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Glass-Mat Faced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C1177/C1177M, gypsum sheathing, glass-mat faced; DensGlass Gold by G-P Gypsum Corporation.

2. Plywood for Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural 1.

3. Plywood for Subflooring: DOC PS 1, Exterior, Structural 1

4. Plywood for Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Exterior A-C.

5. Preservative treatment by pressure process, AWPA U1, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content, maximum.

6. Fire-retardant treatment, AWPA C20, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content, maximum.

7. Building Wrap (Weather-Resistive Barrier): One layer of high density polyethylene (HDPE) product; CommercialWrap by DuPont, DE; www.dupont.com.

8. Self-Adhering Flashing at Openings in Building Wrap: Polyethylene backed rubberized adhesive membrane; DuPont™ FlexWrap™ (70 mils) at sills and DuPont™ StraightFlash™ (30 mils) at heads and jambs.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Custom fabricated casework, countertops, and cabinet hardware.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content, MR5 for regional materials and MR7 for FSC-Certified wood.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credits EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants and EQ 4.4 for composite wood products.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 11: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 11

1. Lumber: Conform to PS 20; Premium Grade in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Section 3.

2. Hardwood plywood: Balanced construction, veneer-core plywood: Grade AA in accordance with WI Manual of Millwork, Section 4. GreenT Veneer Core by Timber Products Company.

3. Softwood plywood: Veneer-core plywood; conforming to PS 1, Exposure 1, Grade A-A, Group 1.

4. Particleboard: Meets or exceeds ANSI A208.1, Class M-2, minimum 45 lbs/ft3 (720 kg/m3).

5. Medium density fiberboard (MDF): Meets or exceeds ANSI A208.2, Class SDF, minimum 45 lbs/ft3 (720 kg/m3), Arreis, Medex, Medite II, and Medite FR2 by Sierra Pine, as applicable.

6. Hardboard: ANSI 135.4, Class 1 – Tempered; smooth-one-side (S1S), minimum 60 lbs/ft3 (960 kg/m3).

7. Thermally fused melamine: Thermoset decorative overlays pre-laminated to substrate by thermal fusion; performance characteristics equal to a general purpose grade or liner grade high pressure laminate as per NEMA LD3.

8. Plastic laminate by Nevamar Decorative Surfaces, Formica Corporation, or accepted equal.

9. Solid surfacing: Corian by DuPont.

10. Hardware:

a. Coat Hook: Ives, Ceiling hook IVBP50A3, brass.

b. Drawer Pulls: U-shaped wire, fully accessible. District Standard. Cat. No. 116.09.644 by Hafele, Cat. No. MC402-SS by Epco, or accepted equal.

c. Hinges: National #B851.

d. Drawer Slides: For pencil drawers, box drawers, file drawers and lateral files; as manufactured by Accuride, Knape & Vogt, or accepted equal.

e. Adjustable Shelf Supports: ANSI/BHMA 156.9 Grade 1, Sekura 1 Cat. No. 1.005.767 by Hettich, Cat. No. 282.24.720 by Hafele, or accepted equal.

f. Countertop Bracket: Steel; gray primed; load capacity 500 kg per pair. Product: Häfele Hebgo bracket Cat. No. 287.45.4XX (use length to match countertop depth), or accepted equal.

g. Magnetic Catches: Mortise type; fixed, press-fit at case; fixed, screw-on counterpiece; for 3/4 inch board thickness; minimum 5.5 pounds pulling power; 0.55 inch x 0.63 inch bore hole; color white. Product: Häfele Cat. No. 246.03.709, Hettich Cat. No. 00378, or accepted equal.

h. Elbow Catch: Heavy duty solid brass. Product: Amerock Cat. No. B238-14A, Epco Part No. 1018-N, or accepted equal.

i. Cabinet locks: Schlage CL Series; District standard, no substitutions.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

Page 12: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 12

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Thermal insulation in exterior wall and ceiling construction, and rigid board insulation at interior walls in semi-exposed condition, and exterior wall sheathing and insulation.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Owens-Corning Fiberglass.

2. Batt insulation: ASTM C665

3. Rigid board: ASTM C612; Type 703.

4. Rigid sheathing insulation: Thermax Metal Building Board by Dow Chemical Co.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 25 00 Weather Barriers

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Building wrap (weather-resistive barrier) and flashing.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Building Wrap (Weather-Resistive Barrier): One layer of high density polyethylene (HDPE) product; CommercialWrap by DuPont, DE; www.dupont.com.

2. Self-Adhering Flashing at Openings in Building Wrap: Polyethylene backed rubberized adhesive membrane; DuPont™ FlexWrap™ (70 mils) at sills and DuPont™ StraightFlash™ (30 mils) at heads and jambs.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 26 50 Vapor Emission Control System

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Vapor emission control system for application over new and existing concrete slabs indicated to receive finished floor coverings or finish coatings.

2. Performance Requirement: Control and maintenance of vapor emission rate of 3 lbs/1,000 sq. ft./24 hrs or less in concrete slabs.

3. Testing of Concrete Slabs: Perform testing at existing concrete slabs indicated to receive finished floor coverings or finish coatings, as follows.

a. Test existing concrete slabs for vapor emission, pH value, and relative humidity, as specified in this Section.

Page 13: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 13

b. When test results indicate vapor emissions exceeding 3 lbs/1,000 sq ft/24 hrs, or pH value exceeding 9.0, or relative humidity exceeding 75 percent, provide vapor emission control system as specified in this Section. Cost of this Work will be covered by a Unit Price.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product:Vapor emission control system; Vap 1® 2000 by Koester American Corporation; 757-425-1206, www.koesterusa.com.

2. Two-component epoxy resin system, 100 percent solids, containing specifically formulated chemicals and resins to provide pH levels within the range of 8-9, as determined by pH testing, and reduce vapor emission level from 15 lbs/1,000 sq ft/24 hrs to 3 lbs/1,000 sq ft/24 hrs or less, as determined by calcium chloride testing (regardless of the level of vapor emissions after initial pre-installation testing) at areas indicated to receive a finished floor covering or finish coating, in one coat application.

3. Testing Meters:

a. Calcium Chloride Moisture and pH Test Kit #625 by Taylor Tools.

b. Digital pH Meter: Model PH100 ExStik® pH Meter by Extech Instruments Corporation.

c. Digital Moisture Meter: BD-2100 Moisture Tester by Delmhorst Instrument Co.

d. Digital RH Meter: Hygromaster with Hygrostik by GE Sensing.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 41 00 Metal Wall Panels

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Preformed metal wall panels, flashings, trim, closures, fasteners, sealants and other accessory items, and insulation.

PART 2 – Products:

1. CS-620 Concept Series Panel by Centria; 16 inch panel width, 7/8 inch depth. 0.8 mil 70 percent Kynar 500 Duragard finish.

2. Foamed Insulation Core Metal Wall Panels: Formawall Dimension Series 2 Inch Thick Horizontal Flat panels by Centria, 30 inch standard joinery with concealed fasteners.

a. 22 gage G90 steel, smooth surface face sheet with 0.8 mil 70 percent Kynar 500 Duragard finish.

b. 26 gage G90 steel liner sheet, embossed, planked with 0.2 mil primer and 0.6 mil acrylic finish.

c. 2 inch urethane or isocyanurate R14 insulation bonded to liner sheet.

3. Accessories: Provide trim, copings, fascia, parapet caps, soffits, sills, inside and outside corners, jambs and miscellaneous flashings, as necessary for a complete installation; fabricate from 6063-T5 aluminum unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Include required fasteners, gaskets, closure strips, and sealants.

Page 14: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 14

4. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, and other acceptable fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. Exposed fasteners to be corrosion resistant, with heads factory finished to match panels.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 42 00 Exterior Solid Phenolic Wall Panels

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Solid phenolic flat panels formed with thermosetting resins, homogenously reinforced with cellulose fibers and manufactured under high pressure and temperature. Panels to have a pigmented resin, decorative surface that is electron-beam cured for superior chemical and dirt resistance.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Panel system by Trespa North America, Poway, CA; 800-487-3772, www.trespanorthamerica.com. Products: Trespa

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 54 23 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section includes fully-adhered or mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing membrane system, gypsum cover board, roof insulation, walkway membrane, and roofing accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit SS 7.2 for heat island effect – roof.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Roofing membrane: Ultraviolet resistant thermoplastic polyolefin membrane reinforced with polyester fabric, 60 mils thick, color: white; Sure-Weld 60 by Carlisle Syntec Inc.

2. Roof insulation: Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core integrally laminated to heavy black (non-asphaltic), fiber-reinforced felt facers with square or tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1. ICC ES Listed. UL Listed; ACFoam-II by Atlas Roofing Corp.

3. Walkway Pads: 0.130 inch thick heat-weldable material by membrane manufacturer, color white.

4. Gypsum Cover Board: Rigid, cellular, extruded polystyrene (XPS) thermal insulation with closed cells formed with polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process; shiplap edges. Comply with ASTM C578, Type, as applicable; compressive strength 40 psi, minimum; DensDeck Fireguard by G-P Gypsum Corp.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

Page 15: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 15

SECTION 07 55 63 Vegetated Protected Membrane Roofing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Vegetated, protected, fluid-applied membrane roofing system, extensive green roof, drip irrigation system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Roofing membrane: Hot, fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt membrane meeting CGSB-37.50-M89 standard; minimum 25 percent post-consumer recycled content.

2. Surface Conditioner: Conforming to ASTM D41.

3. Reinforcing Fabrics:

a. Main Roofing: Spunbonded polyester fabric (standard duty) reinforcing sheet.

b. Drains, Change in Plane, and Metal Surfaces: 60 mil thick, uncured neoprene (heavy duty) reinforcing sheet.

4. Flashing: 157 mils thick, torch-grade, modified asphalt, reinforced flashing membrane.

5. Adhesives and Sealants: Contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing together, contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing to an approved substrate, Sealant to seal elastomeric flashing seam edge.

6. Separation Course and Root Barrier (Protection Course): One layer each of fiberglass reinforced rubberized asphalt protection sheet (separation course) and polyethylene root barrier, applied separately, root barrier over separation course.

7. Insulation: Extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation, ASTM C578, Type VI or VII; minimum 40 psi; CFC free.

8. Drainage/Water Retention Components: Three-dimensional, molded panels of recycled materials with drainage channels on top and bottom sides and water retention reservoirs on top side.

9. Filter Fabric: Non-woven, polymeric, geotextile fabric.

10. Soil: Custom growing medium; soil mixture capable of supporting vigorous growth of the specified vegetation.

11. Vegetation/Plantings: Plant materials shall be suitable for the Project site and local climatic conditions. Requirements of the State of California apply to plant materials imported from out-of-the-state sources.

12. Stone Ballast: Well screened and washed stone gravel conforming to ASTM D448; gradation No. 57, 2, 4, or 5, as required by TechNote 508 by Dow Chemical Company.

13. Plants and Irrigation System: Refer to applicable requirements of Division 32 Sections.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 16: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 16

SECTION 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Exterior wall flashings and roof flashings.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Galvanized steel: ASTM A653, G90; 24 gauge steel.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 72 33 Roof Hatches

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Prefabricated roof hatches, with integral insulated support curbs, operating hardware, and counter-flashings.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Material: Galvanized steel: ASTM A653, G90; 24 gauge steel.

2. Basis-of Design Product:Roof Hatch: Type S hatch by The Bilco Company, New Haven, CT; 203-934-6363, www.bilco.com. Provide the named product or accepted equal by one of the following:

a. Babcock-Davis; www.babcockdavis.com

b. Milcor Inc.; www.milcorinc.com.

3. Unit: 30” x 36” size, single leaf type.

4. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gage galvanized, prime painted steel with 1” rigid glass fiber insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting.

5. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gage galvanized, prime painted steel, 1” glass fiber insulation; sandwiched by 22 gauge steel interior liner; continuous thermoplastic rubber gasket to provide weatherproof seal.

6. Hardware: Compression spring operator and shock absorbers, steel manual pull handle for interior operation, steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release, padlock hasp, heavy-duty pintle type hinges.

7. Safety Post: Model LU-1, Ladder Up by The Bilco Company or accepted equal.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 81 16 Cementitious Fireproofing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for, and incidental to, the complete and proper installation of spray-applied fire-resistive materials and related work.

Page 17: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 17

PART 2 – Products:

1. Material: Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material (SFRM): Material density 15 pcf (standard density) at interior concealed locations and 22 pcf (medium density) at interior exposed locations, and exterior locations. Medium density product to receive manufacturer’s standard seal coat to prevent fiber release.

2. Basis-of-Design Products: Products by Construction Products Division of W. R. Grace & Co, as follows:

a. Monokote Type MK-6, standard density.

b. Monokote Type Z-106, medium density.

c. Monokote Type Z-146, high density.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 84 00 Firestopping

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Firestopping of horizontal and vertical penetrations of fire-rated assemblies.safing insulation in wall and floor/ceiling construction, firestop sealants and caulks, firestop putty and putty pads, firestop spray, firestop collars, large openings, cast-in-place firestop devices, intumescent wrap, and firestop mortar.

2. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Hilti Corp.

2. Materials: Safing insulation in wall and floor/ceiling construction, firestop sealants and caulks, firestop putty and putty pads, firestop spray, firestop collars, large openings, cast-in-place firestop devices, intumescent wrap, and firestop mortar.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Flexible sealants, primers, bond breakers, backstops, cleaning solvents, and accessories designed to seal joints and openings, and prevent moisture migration into the building.

2. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. ASTM C920 sealants, primers, bond breakers, backstops, and cleaning solvents as manufactured by Tremco, Inc.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

Page 18: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 18

SECTION 07 95 00 Expansion Control

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Rated and non-rated expansion joint assemblies for wall and ceiling surfaces.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Manufacturer: Balco, Inc.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS SECTION 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

PART 1 – General:

1. Description:Section includes Standard hollow metal doors and frames, rated and non-rated, sidelites, transoms, infill panels, cased openings, door louvers, and door glazing.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturers – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

a. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

b. Ceco Door Products, TN, 888-232-6366, www.cecodoor.com.

c. Curries Company, Mason City, IA, 800-377-3948, www.curries.com.

d. Steelcraft, OH, 800-243-9780, www.steelcraft.com.

e. Amweld Building Products, Stow, OH, 800-248-6116, www.amweld.com.

2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip for Frames: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M by Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

3. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets for Doors: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M by Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.

4. Doors: Flush Doors, Grade III, Model 2, ANSI/SDI A250; 16 gauge, galvanized steel.

5. Door Frames: Fully-welded, 16 gauge.

6. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement for door hardware, as required.

7. Preparation: Prepare doors and frames for hardware, glazing, and louvers, as required.

8. Finish: Shop primed and field-painted.

9. All exterior metal door frames shall be filled with grout.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 19: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 19

SECTION 08 14 00 Wood Doors

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Rated and non-rated flush wood doors, door louvers, and door glazing.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR5 for regional materials and MR7 for FSC-Certified wood.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Algoma, WI: 800-678-8910, www.algomahardwoods.com.

b. Eggers Industries, Neenah, WI; 920-722-6444, www.eggersindustries.com.

c. Marshfield DoorSystems Inc., Marshfield, WI; 800-869-3667, www.marshfielddoors.com.

d. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc., Northumberland, PA; 570-473-3557, www.mohawkdoors.com.

2. Solid Edge Doors: Maple veneer with transparent finish by Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

3. Solid, Non-rated Particleboard Core: WI Section 12, 5- or 7-ply; Custom Grade standards shall prevail.

4. Solid, 20-minute Rated Particleboard Core: WI Section 12, 5- or 7-ply, Custom Grade.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 31 00 Access Doors and Frames

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Access doors, non-rated.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Non-rated access doors for gypsum board: Model NW by Nystrom.

a. Frame: 16 gage steel.

b. Door: 14 gage steel.

c. Hinge: Concealed continuous piano hinge.

d. Latch: Screwdriver operated, stainless steel cam and stud.

e. Finish: Phosphate dipped, and prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey enamel.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 20: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 20

SECTION 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Steel overhead coiling service doors and operating hardware, manually operated.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corporation.

2. Curtain slats: Interlocking, minimum 22 gauge front cover, 24 gauge back cover, "Stormtite Insulated Slats,” R-value = 5.82, 2-5/8” wide x required length, x 3/4” thick.

3. Curtain bottom: Fitted with angles and weather-stripping to provide reinforcement and positive contact when in closed position.

4. Slat end locks and wind locks: End locks will be used on alternate slats. Windlocks will be used as required to meet 20 psf design wind load.

5. Guides: Roll-formed, three structural steel shapes, continuous, surface mounted with wool pile strip.

6. Roller shaft counterbalance: Steel pipe and torsion steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to assure smooth operation of curtain from any position, with adjustable spring tension.

7. Hood enclosure: 24 gauge galvanized steel, internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape, weather-stripped.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 41 13 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Aluminum storefront system, aluminum and glass doors, vision glass and perimeter sealant.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Storefront system: Series FG 3000 storefront with Series 500 doors by Oldcastle Building Envelope.

2. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

3. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209.

4. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

5. Finish: Anodized.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

Page 21: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 21

SECTION 08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

PART 1 – General:

1. Section includes glazed aluminum curtain wall system, stick or unitized assembly as indicated on Drawings, sealants, and accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

4. Performance Requirement: U-Factor: 0.45.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product:CW-250 by Oldcastle Building Envelope..

2. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper; Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429.

4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M.

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

6. Fasteners: Stainless steel; Perimeter Anchors: Stainless steel or plated steel providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum.

7. Steel Reinforcement: Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M; Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1008/A1008M; Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

8. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads, thermally broken, retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides, center glazed.

9. Sun Shades: Extruded aluminum; provide in custom sizes and profiles, as indicated on Drawings; Solar Eclipse by Oldcastle Building Envelope.

10. Light Shelf: Extruded aluminum; provide in custom sizes and profiles, as indicated on Drawings; Solar Shelf by Oldcastle Building Envelope. 30 inch interior light shelf with bullnose cover.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 45 26 Translucent Fiberglass-Sandwich-Panel Skylights

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Insulated translucent fiberglass sandwich panel skylight system, aluminum framing, and aluminum flashing and accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

4. Structural Requirements:

Page 22: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 22

a. Wind loads for exterior assemblies: Comply with requirements for the project location in accordance with 2013 California Building Code (CBC).

5. Seismic Requirements:

a. Seismic Zone: In accordance with 2013 California Building Code (CBC).

b. Basic System: Passed for use with National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program (NEHRP) Groups I and II.

c. Deflection: L/180 maximum allowable deflection at skylights.

6. Air leakage of skylight shall not exceed 0.3 cubic feet per minute per square foot of glazing area at a pressure differential of 1.57 pounds per square foot when tested according to NFRC-400 or ASTM E283.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Kalwall Corporation, Manchester, NH; 800-256-9777, www.kalwall.com.

2. Translucent Faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically for architectural use.

3. Grid Core: Aluminum I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter.

4. Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives.”

5. Closure System: Standard extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system.

6. Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions.

7. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.

8. Finish: Manufacturer's factory applied finish, which meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604. Color shall be #79, Aluminum.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows, Exterior

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Extruded aluminum-framed fixed and operable windows for exterior locations, and perimeter sealant.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Fixed windows: Series TR-9500 by TRACO;

Page 23: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 23

2. Projecting Windows: TR-3500 by TRACO.

3. Fixed windows: Series TR-9500, TR-7100 by TRACO or accepted equal by Oldcastle Building Envelope.

4. Sliding Windows: Series TR-6300, TR-6800 by TRACO or accepted equal by Oldcastle Building Envelope.

5. Sliding Service Window: DW1800 Deluxe Sliding Window by C.R. Laurence Architectural Products.

6. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

7. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209.

8. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 62 23 Tubular Skylights

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Fixed tubular skylights, integral counter-flashings, and light control louvers.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Dome: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.

2. Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight.

3. Reflective Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch with Spectralight Infinity finish on reflective surface.

4. Lens: Type L1 Optiview Fresnel lens, Classified as CC2, designed to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch thick

5. Daylight Dimmer: Type D Electro-mechanically actuated daylight valve; for universal input voltages ranging between 90 and 277 V at 50 or 60 Hz; maximum current draw of 50 ma per unit; controlled by low voltage, series Type T02: circuited, 4 conductor, size 22 cable; providing daylight output between 2 and 100 percent. Provide with dimmer switch and cable.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Brighten Up Series 14 inch Solatube Model 290 DS Daylighting System by Solatube International, Inc.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 08 71 00 Door Hardware

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Door hardware for hollow steel and wood doors, auxiliary locks, weatherstripping, seals and thresholds, and other accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

Page 24: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 24

PART 2 – Products: Listed products are District Standards. No substitutions permitted. 1. Butt Hinge: Ives 5BB1HW x NRP.

2. Lock Set: Schlage ND Series x Rhodes.

3. Exit Device: Von Duprin CD99Lx996L.

4. Padlock: Kryptonite PL4000.

5. Key System: Schlage Primus Level 3 I.C.

a. Locks to be shipped with construction cores. Permanent cores to be installed in field by Contractor.

6. Coordinator: Ives COR x FL x MB.

7. Flush Bolts:

a. Ives FB31P – (Automatic) (metal doors) (Storage & Utility rooms).

b. Ives FB31P – (Automatic) (wood doors) (Storage & Utility rooms).

c. Ives FB31P – (Manual) (metal doors) (Storage & Utility rooms).

d. Ives FB31P – (Manual) (wood doors) (Storage rooms).

8. Closer LCN 4041 – Thru Bolted.

9. Door Holders: Glynn-Johnson 100ADJ series; Ives WS45 and Ives FS43.

10. Door Stops: Ives FS436/R435, FS18S, and WS401/WS402.

11. Kick/Mop Plate: Ives 8400 Series.

12. Push/Pull Plates: Ives 8200/8300 Series.

13. Dust Proof Strikes: Ives DP2.

14. Latch Guard: Ives LG12.

15. Threshold: National Guard Products 896S.

16. Smoke Seal: National Guard Products 2525.

17. Weather Seal: National Guard Products 162SA at jambs, 700SA at head for PA closers.

18. Door Silencer: Ives SR64.

19. Astragal: National Guard Products 139SS at wood doors, where required by California Fire Code.

20. Drip Guard: National Guard Products 16A.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 81 00 Glass Glazing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Glass and glazing for doors, windows, and interior wall applications, ceramic-coated spandrel glass.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Float glass, tempered glass: 1/4 inch clear glass by PPG Industries.

2. Insulating glass: 1 inch hermetically sealed assembly consisting of 1/4 inch clear glass on the outboard surface, 1/2 inch air space and 1/4 inch clear glass on the inboard surface by Viracon.

Page 25: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 25

3. Low-E insulating Glass: Solarscreen VE 1-85 by Viracon

4. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I (transparent flat glass), Class I (clear), Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 08 91 19 Fixed Louvers

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Continuous steel wall louvers with fixed, drainable blades and all-welded construction.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content, MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Wonder Metals Corporation.

2. Louver blades and frame head, jamb and sill: 16 gauge steel.

3. Insect screen and frame: Galvanized steel frame with 18 x 14 galvanized insect mesh, fabricated by louver manufacturer. Install on interior side of louver.

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES SECTION 09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Fire-rated shaft wall assemblies with acoustical insulation.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Gypsum Shaft Wall Panels: ASTM C36; 5/8-inch thick, Type X, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheetrock Brand® Gypsum Panels by United States Gypsum Company; or accepted equal.

2. Type C Panel, Enhanced: ASTM C1396/C1396M; enhanced Type X (Type C), thickness as required by applicable fire-resistance rating, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheetrock® Brand Firecode® C Core Gypsum Panels by United States Gypsum Company; or accepted equal.

3. Gypsum Shaft Wall Liner Panels, Type SLX and Enhanced Type SLX: ASTM C1396/C1396M; 1-inch thick, Type SLX and enhanced Type SLX; water-resistant, mold and mildew-resistant, non-combustible core.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheetrock® Brand Gypsum Liner Panels by United States Gypsum Company; or accepted equal.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 26: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 26

SECTION 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Metal stud framing and accessories at interior locations.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content, MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Framing system components: ASTM C645, 16 gauge and heavier, Fy = 50 ksi, 18 gauge and lighter, Fy = 33 ksi minimum.

2. Studs and joists: ASTM A653/A653M non-load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access, depths and gauges and spacing as indicated on Drawings.

3. Tracks and headers: Same material and thickness as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive studs. Ceiling Runners: With extended leg retainer.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 22 26.23 Metal Suspension Systems

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Suspended gypsum board ceiling metal framing system.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content, MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Galvanized or galvannealed steel: Conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, minimum G40 or Z120; 16 gage and heavier, Fy = 50 ksi, 18 gage and lighter, Fy = 33 ksi minimum.

2. Main runners: ASTM C645, cold-rolled steel channels; 1-1/2 inch by 6 gage; 0.475 lbs/ft, minimum.

3. Cross-furring: ASTM C645, cold-rolled steel hat channels: 7/8 inch by 25 gage.

4. Wire hangers: ASTM A641/A641M, zinc-coated wire, Class 1, soft temper, pre-stretched.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 24 00 Portland Cement Plastering

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Metal furring and lathing, building wrap (weather-resistive barrier) under metal lath, and over rigid plywood sheathing, Two-coat Portland cement plaster over CMU with integral color acrylic finish coat, and three-coat Portland cement plaster system with integral color acrylic finish coat.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Normal – Type I-II, low alkali; gray color; Portland cement with integral PRF admixture by Omega Products International.

Page 27: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 27

2. Aggregate: In accordance with ANSI/ASTM C897, except that gradation shall meet the following requirements:

Sieve Size Percent Retained on each sieve (by weight) Maximum Minimum

No. 4 0 –– No. 8 10 0 No. 16 40 10 No. 30 65 30 No. 50 90 70 No. 100 100 90-95

a. The sand should have more than 50% retained between any two consecutive sieves nor more than 25% between Nos. 50 and 100 sieves.

3. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that can affect plaster system components.

4. Acrylic finish coat: Vapor permeable, 100% acrylic polymer finish coat with crushed mineral aggregates.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 29 00 Gypsum Board

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: gypsum board, mold and moisture resistant gypsum board, cementitious backer board, tile backer board, hi-impact gypsum board, hi-abuse gypsum board, sound-damping gypsum board, and accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Type X, moisture resistant, by United States Gypsum Company.

2. Mold-Resistant and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M; 5/8 inch thick Type X, mold and moisture resistant core, encased in moisture resistant paper facers; maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Sheetrock® Brand Mold Tough 5/8-inch Firecode®

Core Gypsum Panels by USG.

3. Cementitious backer board: Durock Brand Cement Board by United States Gypsum Company.

4. Tile Backer Board: Fiberock Aqua-Tough by USG.

5. Hi-impact gypsum wall system: Fiberock VHI (Very-High-Impact) gypsum board panel with 2 coats Imperial Veneer by United States Gypsum Company.

6. Hi-abuse gypsum wall system: Fiberock AR (Abuse-Resistant) gypsum board panel with 2 coats Imperial Veneer by United States Gypsum Company.

7. Sound Damping Gypsum Board: 5/8 inch thick, Type X equivalent per ASTM E119, paper-faced gypsum each side of and laminated to a sound absorbing viscoelastic polymer core; ends square cut, tapered edges.

Page 28: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 28

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Quiet Rock ES by Serious Energy.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 30 00 Tiling

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Ceramic tile, setting materials including adhesive and mortar, tile grout, waterproofing membrane and accessories.

2. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants and EQ 4.3 for low emitting materials – flooring systems.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Ceramic tile: ANSI A137.1, Standard Grade by Dal-Tile Corp.

2. Setting materials: As manufactured by C-Cure / Omega Products International, Inc.

3. Grout: As manufactured by C-Cure / Omega Products International, Inc.

4. Waterproofing membrane: As manufactured by C-Cure / Omega Products International, Inc.

5. Accessories: As Manufactured by Schlüter-Systems L.P.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Suspended metal grid ceiling system rated and non-rated, lay in acoustical panels.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Suspension system: USG Donn DXL (rated), USG Donn DX (non-rated) by USG Interiors, Inc.

2. Panels: USG Fissured No. 586 (rated), USG Fissured, No. 562 (non-rated) by USG Interiors, Inc.

3. Panels: Mineral fiber, 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” and 2’ x 4’ x 5/8”.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Resilient sheet flooring, resilient tile flooring, rubber wall base, and accessories.

Page 29: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 29

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR6 for rapidly renewable materials.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants and EQ 4.3 for low emitting materials – flooring systems.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Linoleum sheet, Marmorette and Linorette with NATURCote by Armstrong, or accepted equal by Forbo.

2. Adhesives: Water-resistant type, as recommended by manufacturer for substrates indicated.

3. Rubber wall base, ASTM F1861, Type TS by Roppe.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Modular carpet tile.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants and EQ 4.3 for low emitting materials – flooring systems.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Modular Carpet Tile by Tandus.

2. Rubber wall base, ASTM F1861, Type TS.

3. Adhesives: Water-resistant type, as recommended by manufacturer for substrates indicated.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 72 00 Wall Coverings

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Surface preparation, wall covering, adhesives and accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

3. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Wall covering, Type II supported vinyl material consisting of through pigmented, mold and mildew inhibitorized, polyvinyl chloride film adhered to a pre-shrunk polyester/cotton blend fabric backing.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 30: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 30

SECTION 09 81 00 Acoustical Insulation

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Acoustical insulation at interior partition walls and ceilings.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Manufacturer: Owens-Corning Fiberglass.

2. Batt and blanket insulation: ASTM C665, preformed glass fiber batts and blankets, unfaced and faced.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 09 91 00 Painting

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Surface preparation, surface finish schedule, includes painting of all exposed surfaces, except as otherwise specified or indicated.

2. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.2 for paints and coatings.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Paint: Architectural grade, VOC compliant, as appropriate for interior and exterior substrates; one coat of primer and two finish coats, typical.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Dunn Edwards.

b. Glidden Professional.

c. Sherwin Williams.

d. Kelly Moore.

e. Tnemec. DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces

PART 1 – General:

1. Section includes markerboards, tackboards, interactive white boards, bulletin boards, trim, marker tray and accessories.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Markerboards and tackboards: Series 5, Type C Combination by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

2. Interactive White Boards: As manufactured by SMART Technologies, ULC.

a. Projector Mounting Bracket: Model No. SP-LTMT-PLT by InFocus.

Page 31: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 31

3. Bulletin Boards: Contemporary Cabinets, Model No. 2041 by Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.

4. Frame: Manufacturer's standard profile; concealed fasteners.

5. Marker tray: Manufacturer's standard profile; one piece, full length of markerboard with end closures; concealed fasteners.

6. Map Rail: Model #151 by Claridge, Continuous 1 inch map rail with cork insert and end stops at each end of markerboard.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 10 14 00 Signage

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Exterior accessibility signage, exterior post and panel signage, exterior dimensional letters, interior door signage, and life safety signage.

2. Regulatory Requirements: Accessible signages in accordance with CBC Chapter 11B and with ADAAG.

3. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content and MR5 for regional materials.

4. LEED Indoor Air Quality Requirements: Products of this Section shall meet the requirements of LEED Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants.

PART 2 –Products:

1. ASTM B209 for sheet or plate; ASTM B221 for extrusions, and ASTM B26/B26M for castings. Aluminum extrusions shall be 1/8 inch (3mm) thick minimum. Wall panels shall be 3/64 inch (1.25mm) thick minimum. Post mounted panels shall be 1/8 inch (3mm) thick minimum. Aluminum panels shall have baked porcelain enamel finish..

2. Exterior post and panel signage, steel: Post: ASTM A500, Grade B. Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick steel cap (ASTM A283/A283M) welded to top of post. Galvanize post and cap to minimum G50 in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.

3. Vinyl sheet for graphics: Precision cut with reflecting surface; 5 to 7 year premium type and shall be in accordance with flammability requirements of ASTM E84; minimum 0.003 inch (0.09 mm) film thickness. Film shall include a precoated pressure sensitive adhesive backing or positionable pressure sensitive backing.

4. Exterior dimensional letters: Cast aluminum; ASTM B26/B26M, anodized finish by Metallic Arts.

5. Interior signage: Acrylic plastic, minimum 1/8 inch thick, opaque acrylic with integral color and satin matte finish.

6. Exit signs: Internally illuminated exit signs conforming to NFPA 101 Section 7.10.7; UL listed in accordance with UL 924, with wording in legible characters not less than 4 inch high and text “EXIT”.

Page 32: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 32

SECTION 10 21 13.33 Solid Phenolic Toilet Compartments

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Solid phenolic core toilet compartments, floor supported and overhead braced, solid phenolic core urinal screens, wall mounted.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credits MR4 for recycled content, and MR5 for regional materials.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: 1082 DuraLine Series by Bobrick.

2. Doors, panels, pilasters, and urinal screens shall be solid one piece phenolic black, plastic core with high pressure matte melamine surface fused to the core. Finish color as selected by Architect.

3. Leveling devices shall be chromate treated and zinc plated steel..

4. Pilaster shoes shall be Type 304 stainless steel with #4 satin brushed finish.

5. Headrails shall be etched and anodized extruded aluminum.

SECTION 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Toilet accessories and attachment hardware.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Toilet accessories by Bobrick.

2. Mirrors and grab bars by Bobrick.

3. Stainless steel sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.

4. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.

5. Fasteners, screws, and bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamperproof.

6. Expansion shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Fire extinguishers, cabinets, wall brackets, “Knox” lock boxes, and accessories.

2. LEED Contribution: Products of this Section shall contribute to Credit MR4 for recycled content.

PART 2 – Products:

Page 33: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 33

1. Regular Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguisher: UL 299, five pound capacity, enameled steel tank, with pressure gauge, minimum 3A-40B:C Rating, Cosmic Series 5E by J.L. Industries, Inc.

2. Class K Fire Extinguisher: Wet chemical type, UL 8, 2-1/2 gallon capacity, stainless steel tank with pressure gage; minimum 2A:K Rating, Saturn Series 25 by J.L. Industries, Inc..

3. Semi-recessed cabinet: Ambassador Series, Model No. 1817V10 (non-fire-rated), and Model No. 1817V10FX (fire rated) by J.L. Industries, Inc.

4. Cabinet for Class K Extinguishers: Ambassador Series, Model No. 2017V10 (semi-recessed, non-ratedk); Model No. 2017V10FX (semi-recessed, fire rated).

5. Fire Extinguisher Wall Bracket: Model No. MB818 by J.L. Industries, Inc.

6. Key access box: Key access box for use by the fire department, as manufactured by Knox Manufacturing Company.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 10 71 13 Exterior Sun Control Devices

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Aluminum sun control assemblies

PART 2 – Products:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5 alloy or T-52 extruded aluminum members complying with ASTM B221.

2. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming complying with ASTM B209, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish

3. Blade: 6” aluminum airfoil blade.

4. Outrigger: Tapered aluminum plate.

5. Fascia: Aluminum channel.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 10 73 16 Metal Canopies

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes:

a. Extruded aluminum walkway canopies with steel post protector channels.

b. Extruded aluminum hanger rod canopies.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Walkway Canopy Components:

a. Support Columns and Gutter Beams: Columns shall be notched to create a “saddle” to receive and secure gutter beams.

b. Decking: Interlocking extruded aluminum members with field applied mechanical fasteners.

Page 34: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 34

c. Beams and Posts: Mechanically assembled utilizing 3/16-inch fasteners with a minimum shear stress of 350 pounds. Pre-welded or factory-welded connections are not acceptable

d. Fascia: Manufacturer’s standard extruded 6-inch style.

e. Concealed Drainage: Water shall drain from covered surfaces into intermediate trough and be directed to standard post drain.

f. Finish: White baked enamel.

2. Hanger Rod Canopy Components:

a. Decking: 2-3/4 inch deep x 6 inch wide x 0.078 thickness interlocking extruded 6063-T6 aluminum flat soffit.

b. Fascia: 8 inch deep “G” style, 0.125 extruded 6063-T6 aluminum.

c. Support Beams: 3.31 inch x 3.31 inch x 0.25 extruded aluminum “I” beams.

d. Hanger Rods and Hardware: 1 inch diameter schedule 40 steel pipe; 1/4 inch thick steel angles and plates; drop-forged 5/8 inch steel clevis; 5/8 inch x 6 inch steel threaded rods; steel bolts, nuts, and washers as standard with manufacturer.

e. Wall Fasteners:1/2 inch diameter steel thru eyebolts with steel washers, nuts and backing plates; 1/2 inch diameter steel hex bolts with 7/8 inch outside diameter steel pipe spacers and 1/2 inch double machine bolt anchors; Escutcheon Plates: 7 inch by 7 inch extruded aluminum.

f. Drainage: Concealed integral gutters and fascia drains with 0.032 aluminum scuppers.

g. Finishes: Aluminum – clear anodized; Steel – two coat Kynar paint system, color to match clear anodized aluminum.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

SECTION 10 90 10 TV Monitor Mounts

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Articulating flat panel TV wall mounts.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Video Mount Products (VMP).TV mount: Model PDS-LWA.

2. Maximum Load Capacity: 180 lbs.

3. Mounting Range: 42 inch to 63 inch flat panel TV monitors.

4. Rotation: Up to 45 degrees; Tilt: -5 degrees to +15 degrees.

5. Color: Silver.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

Page 35: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 35

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 52 13.26 Electric Projection Screens

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Electric projection screens.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Manufacturer: Da-Lite.

2. Concealed mounting type projection screen electrically operated by remote control, 120 volt (60 Hz.) 1.0 amp screen, 8’H x 8’W, shall have specially designed motor mounted inside the roller with a patented noise silencer to be three wire quick reversal type, oiled for life, with automatic thermal overload cutout, integral gears, capacitor and an electric brake to prevent coasting. Screen shall have preset but adjustable limit switches to automatically stop picture surface in the “up” and “down” positions. The roller shall be of rigid metal, 3 inches in diameter, mounted on two vibration and noise absorbing supports. Screen fabric shall be flame retardant and mildew resistant fiberglass with matte white surface and black masking borders standard. Bottom of fabric shall be formed into a pocket holding a 3/8” diameter metal rod. Case shall be 22 gauge embossed steel with baked enamel paint finish, hexagonal in shape, with flat back to prevent scraping fabric. Provide case end caps to allow no exposed roller pins. Powder coated caps shall form sturdy brackets for ceiling installation screen shall be complete with three position control switch in box with cover plate. Screen shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories and CSA.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Horizontal slat louver blinds with valance and operating hardware.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Product: 1-inch wide slats, aluminum with baked enamel finish; Riviera Classic Mini Blind by Levolor.

2. Louver Slats: Aluminum alloyed for maximum strength, flexibility and resistance to corrosion, nominally 1-inch wide and 8 gage minimum thickness.

3. Steel channel headrail: “U” shaped 1-inch by 1-1/2” deep channel, 0.025” thick, fabricated from phosphate treated steel with rolled edges at top, with prime coat of vinyl primer and finished coat of polyester baked enamel to match bottomrail and end support brackets and to coordinate with slats. Headrail shall be roll-formed

Page 36: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 36

4. Head channel hardware: Hardware shall be acetal low friction thermoplastic and guide lift cords and ladders in the head channel preventing wear and discoloration.

5. Enclosed metal bottomrail: Completely enclosed tubular shape, phosphate treated steel with prime coat of vinyl primer and finished coat of polyester baked enamel matching headrail and coordinating with slat color. Bottomrail shall be roll-formed with locking groove to receive dust cover. Hold-down bracket pins shall be available. Bottomrail shall measure 0.025” thick.

6. Tilt Wand: The tilt wand shall be a clear polycarbonate hollow rod, with a hexagonal shape measuring approximately 1/4” across the points, providing a positive, comfortable grip. The want shall hang vertically by its own weight and should be of sufficient length for easy access and operation. Wand shall be attached to the tilter shaft by means of a spring clip and shall be easily detached and reattached in the field.

7. Braided Ladder Material: Material shall be 100% high tenacity polyester yarn. Vertical component shall be not less than 0.045” diameter nor greater than 0.066” diameter, and shall provide maximum strength and flexibility with minimum stretch. Horizontal component, or rungs, shall be not less than two threads and shall be approximately 31.0mm long. Ladders shall be of sufficient length for bottom of blind to hang with a tolerance of plus one half/minus zero inches of the specified length. Standard ladder shall provide 20mm minimum distance between the slats. Ladders shall be dyed to manufacturers color standard.

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13 52 00 Seismic Requirements for Non-Structural Components

PART 1 –General:

1. Section includes seismic requirements for the design and installation of nonstructural components that are permanently attached to structures and for their supports and attachments. Unless otherwise noted, all items shall be designed in accordance with the seismic provisions of the California Building Code (CBC).

PART 2 – Products:

1. Non-structural interior and exterior components of the facility including but not limited to the following:

a. Mechanical equipment and anchorage.

b. Mechanical duct support.

c. Electrical equipment and anchorage.

d. Electrical and Telecommunication Conduit raceway support.

e. Plumbing and Process Pipe Support.

f. Fire Sprinkler Line Pipe Support.

g. Systems Furniture.

h. Door and frame assemblies.

i. Window System.

Page 37: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 37

j. RAS and Telecommunication Equipment.

k. Interior partitions and hard framed ceiling and soffits.

l. Suspended ceilings supports and ceiling mounted equipment.

m. Wall mounted equipment including casework, markerboards, tackboards, and toilet accessories.

n. Components listed in ASCE 7, Chapter 13.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used.

DIVISIONS 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

SECTION 14 21 00 Electric Traction Passenger Elevators

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Installation of traction elevator system materials and installation specifications.

PART 2 – Products:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: EcoSpace Machine-Room-Less (MRL) Elevator by KONE, Inc.

2. Controller: Provide microcomputer based control system to perform all of the functions.

3. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used.

DIVISIONS 15 TO 20 – NOT USED

DIVISION 21 – FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 21 00 00 Fire Protection

PART 1 – General:

1. SCOPE

a. Work Included: Design, furnish, and install complete and fully functioning fire protection system.

b. The following related work is not included in this Section:

i. All concrete work.

ii. All painting.

iii. All disconnects and motor starters (except those specified herein).

Page 38: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 38

iv. Fire alarm panel, smoke detectors, and other life safety controls and associated wiring.

v. HVAC work including heating system piping, chilled or condenser water piping, etc.

vi. All plumbing work.

vii. All louvers and flues.

viii. Architectural sheet metal and flashings.

ix. Drywall.

x. Forming and framing of floor or wall openings.

xi. Cutting, coring, patching, trenching, and backfilling.

xii. Access doors and access panels in finished walls, floors, or ceilings.

xiii. Temporary heat, power, or restroom facilities.

xiv. Kitchen equipment.

2. DEFINITIONS, CODES, & STANDARDS

a. Specifications, standards, tests and recommended methods from following trade, industry and government organizations shall determine quantity and quality of materials and methods.

i. American Gas Association (AGA)

ii. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

iii. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

iv. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

v. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

b. This project shall strictly comply with the following locally approved codes including their adopted amendments shall be used for this project:

i. 2006 International Building Code

ii. 2010 California Mechanical Code

iii. 2010 California Plumbing Code

iv. 2010 California Title 24 Energy Code

v. 2006 International Fire Code (approved by Local Fire Authority)

vi. 2008 National Electrical Code

vii. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), applicable standards.

viii. Accessibility - More Stringent of 2006 IBC- International Building Code or Applicable Federal Law including Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

ix. Local Fire Department Guidelines

x. LEED for New Construction 2009

xi. Other applicable local codes

c. Where locally adopted codes are silent on an issue, NFPA Standards shall apply.

Page 39: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 39

d. Materials and equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

e. Industry standards and manufacturers' recommendations, diagrams or requirements shall be strictly adhered to for installation of materials and equipment.

3. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN PROCEDURE

a. The fire suppression systems for this project are to be designed and built using a design/build approach as follows:

i. This specification is intended to: (a) Specify system performance/design criteria. The Fire Protection

Contractor's proposal shall not deviate from these Design Criteria without written approval. Questions regarding the appropriateness or correctness of requirements shall be directed to the General Contractor in writing prior to bid. Any changes in design or performance criteria shall be disseminated to all bidders.

(b) Establish the desired level of quality, including suggested design options that the Engineer feels shall meet the performance requirements and design intent. Fire Protection Contractors' proposals may be based on the suggested approaches or on any other design of similar quality. If there is a question as to the appropriateness of any alternative system ideas, the Fire Protection Contractor shall review the proposed design (in the strictness confidence) with the Engineer (Integral Group) prior to bid.

b. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for final system sizing and selection of equipment.

c. The fire sprinkler system shall be designed by the contractor to provide the specified performance requirements in the most cost-optimum fashion.

PART 2 –Materials:

1. FIRE SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS

a. GENERAL

i. The Fire Protection Contractor (FPC) shall be a licensed Fire Protection Engineer and shall be a California C-16 Contractor in good standing and be the Designer and Builder of the Fire Protection System. The FPC shall engineer, fabricate, and install a complete and approved hydraulically designed fire protection systems indicated herein to equal or exceed National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13, 14, 20 and 22, whichever is applicable, and in accordance with Las Positas College Fire Marshal requirements and those authorities having jurisdiction.

ii. All hydraulic calculations shall be based upon the minimum available water flow and pressure available onsite, and the static pressure, flow and residual pressure used to calculate the system shall be indicated on the plans.

iii. Base the piping system and arrangement of heads upon Architectural and Structural considerations. All pipe sizes and number of heads to be used for each area or room shall conform to the requirements to the

Page 40: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 40

California Building Code and the National Fire Protection Association Standard 13.

iv. Hydraulically calculate the entire fire protection system. Submit calculations and plans to Las Positas College for approval and acceptance.

(a) Base Calculations on the following:

I. Maximum area coverage per sprinkler head shall be in accordance with NFPA Standards or the UL Listing/FM Approval as appropriate.

II. Minimum rate of water application (density) shall be:

a. Light Hazard - 0.10 gpm/FT²

b. Ordinary Hazard 1 - 0.15 gpm/FT²

c. Ordinary Hazard 2 - 0.20 gpm/FT²

d. Extra Hazard 1 - 0.30 gpm/FT²

e. Extra Hazard 2 - 0.40 gpm/FT²

v. Fire Protection Contractor shall obtain current water flow and pressure data from a reliable source such as the fire department or water purveyor. No test older than 6 months should be used.

vi. Sprinkler head shall be positioned in accordance with their UL Listing.

vii. Sprinkler head spacing shall be as required by NFPA 13, except as follows: In all locations, sprinkler heads shall be equidistant between lights, between wall and lights, between lights and air diffusers, and between wall, lights, and air diffusers. Provide uniform and repetitive pattern for each room. Center sprinkler heads on joints in acoustic tile or center in tiles in order to conform to above. Obtain approval from the Architect for the sprinkler head layout and coordinate with other trades.

viii. Provide high temperature sprinkler heads with guards in all electrical rooms. Provide sectional control valve and auxiliary drain for all main electrical and high voltage rooms.

ix. Seismic Performance: Fire-suppression piping shall be capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads."

b. BURIED PIPING

i. Shall be made and manufactured in the U.S.

ii. Below Grade Water Service outside of the building to a point 5'-0” outside the building: Wrapped Class 54, AWWA C104, cement-lined ductile iron with mechanical joints in accordance with NFPA 24; or Schedule 80 CPVC complying with AWWA C900.

c. ABOVE GROUND PIPING

i. Shall be made and manufactured in the U.S.

ii. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, black.

(a) Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded.

Page 41: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 41

(b) Above Ground and inside the building: Schedule 40, ASTM A-53 Black steel pipe with threaded, welded or cut grooved joints for sizes 2” and below. Mains may be flexible or rigid couplings. Pipe 2-1/2” and over can be mechanical flexible grooved couplings.

(c) Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4, threaded fittings.

(d) Malleable Iron or Ductile Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings.

(e) Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe.

iii. Welded joints shall be made using factory-fabricated steel welding fittings.

iv. Grooved end malleable iron fittings and bolted clamp type malleable iron couplings with rubber sealing gaskets for grooved end pipe with appropriate pressure rating, similar to Victaulic Style 75 may be used, where couplings shall be provided with rubber “flush seal” gaskets of the same manufacturer as the coupling and intended to be used together.

v. Unions: Provide ground joint type unions for 2 inch and smaller pipe, of galvanized iron with brass seats.

vi. Black and hot-dipped zinc-coated (Galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe, ASTM A 795:

(a) Between Siamese and check valve, ball drip drains, drain and test piping subject to alternate wetting and drying, test and relief piping, water motor gong piping, and normally dry piping.

(b) Fittings and couplings for galvanized shall be galvanized.

vii. Provide anti-microbial internal coating protection for all pipes.

d. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

i. Per NFPA 13.

ii. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1" to 6": Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

iii. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

iv. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

v. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.

vi. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

vii. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

viii. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

e. GATE VALVES

Page 42: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 42

i. Listed Fire Protection Valves: UL and ULC listed and State Fire Marshal listed. Provide valves of same manufacturer, including valves furnished with equipment.

(a) Gate Valves, 2 inches and smaller, bronze body (no copper alloy (brass) allowed containing more than 15% zinc), threaded ends, and 175 psig CWP rating, Nibco T-104-0 or equal.

(b) Gate Valves, 2-1/2 inches and larger, cast iron or ductile iron body, bronze mounted with solid wedge, flanged ends, and 175 psig CWP rating, Nibco F-607-O or equal.

f. GLOBE VALVES

i. Listed Fire Protection Valves: UL and ULC listed and State Fire Marshal listed. Provide valves of same manufacturer, including valves furnished with equipment.

(a) Globe Valves, 2 inches and smaller, 150-pound flanged body, screwed ends, rising stem, TFE impregnated asbestos-free packing, Nibco ¼” to 1”: KT65UL; & 1-1/4” to 2”: KT211WUL or equal.

(b) Globe Valves, 2-1/2 inches, 150-pound flanged iron body, bronze-mounted, bronze rising stem, TFE impregnated asbestos-free packing, Nibco T211WUL or equal.

g. BUTTERFLY VALVES

i. Listed Fire Protection Valves: UL and ULC listed and State Fire Marshal listed. Provide valves of same manufacturer, including valves furnished with equipment.

(a) Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2 inches and larger, iron body lug or grooved end type, 703SS, shaft-type 316, ductile iron disc, Buna N seat-less than 180°F service, EPT seat 180°F to 250°F service, shall be Nibco or Groovelock 7700 series.

h. CHECK VALVES

i. Listed Fire Protection Valves: UL and ULC listed and State Fire Marshal listed. Provide valves of same manufacturer, including valves furnished with equipment.

(a) Check Valves, 2 inches and smaller, screw bonnet, horizontal swing Y-pattern, National pipe thread, integral, renewable Teflon disc, Nibco KT403W or equal. Check valves shall be provided at each floor control valve assembly.

(b) Check Valves, 2-1/2 inches and larger, swing type, cast iron body, flanged ends, and 175 psig CWP rating, Nibco F908-W or equal.

i. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

i. Backflow Preventer-similar to Febco 850 and provided with supervisory switch.

j. TEST-N-DRAIN

i. Provide Test-n-Drain valve for each floor control valve and/or flow switch.

k. MAIN WATER FLOW SWITCH

i. Provide main water flow switch.

Page 43: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 43

l. PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

i. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated.

ii. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

iii. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, push-on-joint pipe and fittings and restrained joints.

iv. Underground Service-Entrance Piping: Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe and fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

m. STANDPIPE SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

i. Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

ii. Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe with square-cut-grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

n. SPRINKLER SYSTEM PIPING APPLICATIONS

i. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

ii. NPS 2 and Larger: Threaded-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; cast- or malleable-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

iii. NPS 2 and Larger: Grooved-end, black, standard-weight steel pipe; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

o. VALVE APPLICATIONS

i. The following requirements apply:

(a) Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by NFPA 13.

I. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.

(b) Unlisted General-Duty Valves: For applications where UL-listed and FMG-approved valves are not required by NFPA 13.

I. Shutoff Duty: Use butterfly or gate valves.

II. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.

p. SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

i. The following sprinkler types:

(a) Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

(b) Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers.

(c) Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

(d) Sprinkler Finishes:

I. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished

Page 44: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 44

spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.

II. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

III. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

2. STANDPIPES

a. VALVES

i. Hose Connection Valve: Angle type; brass finish; 2-1/2 inch size, thread to match fire department hardware, 300 psi working pressure, with threaded cap and chain of same material and finish.

ii. Hose Connection Valve Cabinets:

(a) Style: Recessed mounted.

(b) Tub: 16 gage thick steel, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-in.

(c) Door: 12 gage thick steel, flush, glazed with 6 mm thick wired glass full panel; hinged, positive latch device.

(d) Finish: Enameled, color as selected.

b. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

i. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish.

ii. Outlets: Number of connections to be determined by the design build contractor with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish.

iii. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside.

iv. Label: "Standpipe - Fire Department Connection".

3. FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

a. SPRINKLER SYSTEM

i. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building.

ii. Occupancy: Comply with NFPA 13.

iii. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data.

iv. Interface system with building control system.

v. Provide fire department connections where indicated.

vi. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to control valve.

b. SPRINKLERS

i. General

(a) Sprinkler Heads: Provide UL and Factory Mutual (FM) approved sprinkler heads by Tyco Fire Products, Viking, Reliable or equal.

(b) All sprinkler heads which are located as to be subject to mechanical injury in either upright or pendant position shall have guards or protective covers.

Page 45: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 45

(c) All sprinkler head type and location shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect.

ii. Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate.

(a) Semi-recessed type: Pendant fusible link type semi-recessed automatic spray heads with chrome ceiling escutcheons and head located in area with ceilings. Sprinklers shall be selected based upon their suitability for the construction features and occupancy conditions.

(b) Quick response sprinklers may be selected if desirable and acceptable to the Las Positas College and those authorities having jurisdiction.

(c) Finish: Chrome plated.

(d) Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated.

(e) Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

iii. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with matching screw on escutcheon plate.

iv. Concealed type: small, solder link and lever spray sprinklers, hidden from view by low profile, small diameter cover plates installed flush to the ceiling. Cover plates finishes shall meet the design requirements.

(a) Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

(b) Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

(c) Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

v. Exposed Area Type: Standard upright type.

(a) Standard Upright: Pendant fusible link type, automatic water spray bronze heads with standard plain brass finish located in area without ceilings. Sprinklers shall be selected based upon their availability for the construction features and occupancy conditions. Quick response sprinklers may be selected if desirable and acceptable to the Las Positas College Fire Marshal and authorities having jurisdiction.

(b) Finish: Chrome plated.

(c) Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

(d) Sidewall Type: Standard horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate and guard.

I. Sidewall Type: Semi-recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching screw on escutcheon plate and guard. Finish: enamel, color as selected.

II. Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

III. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected.

Page 46: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 46

IV. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

V. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish.

c. PIPING SPECIALTIES

i. Flow Switches: Shall be California State Fire Marshal listed vane-type with automatic recycle retard and DPDT contacts, Potter Electric Signal Co. 6200, 24V D.C. with two normally open electrical contacts for connections, specified under Electrical Division, to fire alarm and annunciator systems. If system is dry pipe, preaction, or deluge type, a pressure switch shall be used in lieu of a vane type switch.

ii. Valve Supervision Switches: Shall be California State Fire Marshal listed and UL listed. Provide, on main fire sprinkler riser gate valve, and on all other valves controlling water supplies to fire system, a 24V D.C.electrical switch with two normally open contacts which will automatically close when valve is closed; for connection, specified in Electrical Division, to fire alarm "trouble indicator light". Supervisory switches shall be manufactured by Potter Electrical Signal Company.

iii. Test and Drain Assembly: Pre-assembled indicating stainless steel quarter turn ball valve arrangement; one handle with dual control to provide positive-stop, positioning for test, drain and shut-off; self-cleaning sight-glass assembly; visual flow indicator for both alarm test and flow test; UL Listed.

iv. Alarm Bells: Potter Electrical Signal Company Model 6230, System Sensor SSV 120-10, 10 inch diameter, 120 volt AC.

v. Hose Valves: Potter Roemer or equal, polished chrome.

vi. Fire Department Connections: Potter Roemer or equal, polished chrome.

vii. Test to be witnessed by the Fire Marshal.

4. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SCOPE OF WORK

a. Scope of Work:

i. Fire department connections shall be located on the building face on each side where there is a street.

ii. Fire standpipes shall be located in each required exit stairway as required by applicable code.

iii. Fire standpipes shall be located on the roof as required by applicable code.

iv. The fire sprinkler system shall be a complete and operational system when complete.

5. FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Work Included: Furnish and install a complete, fully automatic fire protection system as described by the complete set of specifications and project drawings. This project shall be ‘Design/Build’. The chosen fire protection contractor shall be responsible for preparing a complete working set of documents, including but not limited to the preparation of the permit set of drawings and shop drawings.

6. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS (220500)

Page 47: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 47

a. Vinyl and PVC products shall be avoided to the extent reasonably possible for this project. One exception shall be the combination flue/vent system for the condensing boilers.

b. All sealant products shall be no- or low- VOC.

c. All solder shall be lead-free.

d. Select all equipment rated for design pressures in this high rise project.

7. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

a. Provide mechanical identification of all piping, valves, etc.

8. PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS

a. Provide expansion joint in piping at each cross over of an expansion joint.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 01 Plumbing General Requirements

PART 1 – General:

1. The following related work is not included in this Section:

a. All concrete work.

b. All painting.

c. All wiring, except plumbing equipment interlock and control wiring.

d. All disconnects and motor starters (except those specified herein).

e. Fire alarm panel, smoke detectors, and other life safety controls and associated wiring.

f. HVAC work including heating system piping, chilled or condenser water piping, etc.

g. All louvers and flues.

h. Architectural sheet metal and flashings.

i. Drywall.

j. Forming and framing of floor or wall openings.

k. Cutting, coring, patching, trenching, and backfilling.

l. Access doors and access panels in finished walls, floors, or ceilings.

m. Temporary heat, power, or restroom facilities.

n. Kitchen equipment.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Work Included: Furnish and install a complete, fully automatic plumbing system as described by the complete set of specifications and project drawings. This project shall be ‘Design/Build’. The chosen plumbing contractor shall be responsible for preparing a complete working set of documents, including but not limited to the preparation of the permit set of drawings and shop drawings.

Page 48: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 48

2. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions shall be followed in cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and Specifications.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used SECTION 22 05 01 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

PART 1 – General:

1. All plumbing fixtures shall be specified as low-flow or waterless fixtures, per the water use reduction goals of the project. If the project is to be LEED certified, the Plumbing Contractor shall perform the water use reduction credit calculations to ensure that the plumbing fixtures specified meet the low water use requirements of the project. In all cases, a maximum of 1.28 gpf toilets shall be used.

2. All restroom faucets shall have aerators at a maximum of 0.35gpm.

3. All urinals shall have a flowrate of zero (0) gallons per flush.

4. All showers shall have a flowrate of 1.5 gpm (maximum).

5. All plumbing fixtures shall be approved by the project Architect.

6. The project has a LEED goal of Platinum under LEED for New Construction 2009. The point breakout is 4 points for 40% water use reduction, 3 points for 35% water use reduction and 2 points for water use reduction of 20%. To get a 40% reduction in domestic water use the fixtures would need to be 1.28 gallon per flush (gpf) water closets, zero water consumption urinals, 0.35 gpm lavatory faucets, and 1.5 gpm showers. If either the urinal or the lavatory faucet flowrate is changed to 0.125 gpf (urinal) or 0.5 gpm (lavatory) the percentage would be reduced to 38% and the points received would be reduced to 3. If both the urinal and the lavatory faucet were changed as described above the percentage of water use reduction would be 36% and the points awarded would still be 3 points. If the contractor deviates from the basis of design which is 40% water use reduction the Architect must approve this prior to the selection, procurement and installation of fixtures.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Vinyl and PVC products shall be avoided to the extent reasonably possible for this project.

2. All sealant products shall be no- or low- VOC.

3. All solder shall be lead-free.

4. Select all equipment rated for design pressures in this high rise project.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Motor requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 49: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 49

1. Provide NEMA premium efficiency motors on all products with a minimum efficiency of 98%.

2. ECM motors shall be used whenever possible.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 50 Hangers and Supports

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Mounting requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. All piping shall be adequately supported from the structure.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Restraint requirements and requested submittals.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide seismic restraints to meet requirements of the UBC. Restraints shall not short-circuit vibration isolation systems under normal operation as required by acoustic and vibration consultant.

2. Design restraints shall be per code or SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 53 Identification For Plumbing Piping and Equipment

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Type of equipment requiring identification.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide mechanical identification of all piping, valves, etc.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 07 16 Plumbing Equipment Insulation

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Steel decking and accessories, framing for openings up to and including 24 inches.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Hot Equipment: Hot water storage tanks shall be insulated per Title 24 or more stringent codes that apply.

Page 50: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 50

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Locations, amounts, and type of insulation required at Plumbing equipment.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide pipe insulation for all hot water piping per Title 24 code requirements. Provide weatherproof non-vinyl jacket for all piping exposed to the outdoors, including piping located in the parking garage (if applicable).

2. Hot water piping shall be insulated per Title 24 code requirements with fiberglass molded pipe insulation with all service jacket, thickness as follows:

a. 1" thick up to 2" pipe, 1-1/2" thick from 2-1/2" and larger pipe.

b. Fittings on pipe over 1/2" shall be insulated with fiberglass and finished with one piece non-PVC fitting cover. Valves, flanges and irregular surfaces two inches and over shall be insulated with oversized pipe covering with ASJ jacket. Exposed ends shall be finished with four ounce canvas jacket saturated in Arabol.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping

PART 1 – General:

1. Plumbing systems shall be designed with the following minimum pressure, friction and energy efficiency requirements. The contractor is highly encouraged to provide low energy and low water use system designs beyond those described herein. In many cases, increased energy efficiencies may be realized by careful attention to selection of equipment and system design, beyond the guidelines set herein, at no cost impact to the project.

2. Piping Systems:

a. All piping shall be designed to minimize pressure drop throughout the system, including but not limited to, the sizing of pipe, the type of fittings typically used, and the selection of the valves and miscellaneous appurtenances on the piping system.

b. 45 degree elbows and wye fittings shall be used whenever possible.

c. Where 90 degree elbows are required, due to the physical constraints of the installation, a minimum of 1.5 times the radius elbow shall be used.

d. NEMA premium efficiency motors shall be used with a minimum efficiency of 98%. ECM motors shall be used whenever possible.

e. Triple duty valves shall not be used, due to their high pressure drop.

f. On all 1 1/2” valves (excluding check valves), a minimum Cv of 250 is required. On all 2” valves and larger (excluding check valves), a minimum Cv of 450 is required.

Page 51: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 51

g. Swing check valves only shall be used when check valves are required, due to their lower pressure drop.

3. Domestic Cold Water

a. Domestic cold water shall be connected to all domestic plumbing fixtures within the building. The incoming domestic water shall be routed to domestic water booster pumps located in the basement. These pumps shall boost the pressure so that adequate pressure will be provided throughout the building. A pressure maintenance tank shall be located on the 29th floor.

b. Pressure reducing valves will be required on all floor where the pressure exceeds 80 psi.

c. Domestic water pipe material shall be type L copper above grade, type K copper underground.

d. Make-up water shall be provided via a reduced pressure backflow preventer. A floor drain shall be installed in the floor directly under the backflow preventer.

4. Domestic Hot Water

a. Unless directed otherwise by the Authority Having Jurisdiction the domestic hot water shall be designed for a temperature of 120 degrees F. Recirculation pumps and loops shall not be required because of the proximity of the water heater to the point of use.

5. Sanitary Waste and Vent

a. A complete sanitary waste and vent system shall be provided, in accordance with the California Plumbing Code, throughout the building.

b. Sanitary Waste & Vent shall be routed by gravity to the combined sewer in the street. Where it is not possible to meet the street invert by gravity a submersible pumping system shall be installed.

c. A gravity system shall be provided for fixtures above grade, where it is possible to meet the invert elevations of the existing sewer system. Piping material shall be “no hub” cast iron.

d. Condensate from fan coil units shall be routed through the shear wall and terminate at the mop sink. Contractor to furnish and install condensate pumps as required where it is not possible to route the condensate by gravity.

6. Storm Drainage

a. A new storm drainage system shall be installed with an overflow system as required by code.

b. Storm drainage will be routed by gravity to the combined sewer in the street. Where it is not possible to meet the street invert by gravity a submersible pumping system shall be installed.

7. Condensate Drainage

a. Condensate drainage from the boilers shall be routed through a neutralizing kit before terminating at a sanitary receptor.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 52: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 52

1. Piping system components shall be selected for maximum design operating pressure based on static head, shutoff pump head, and pressure relief valve setting.

2. Domestic Water Piping

a. Provide domestic water piping, fittings, connections, and shut-off valves from the water main through the building as indicated on the drawings in accordance with the California Plumbing Code.

b. It is the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor to obtain flow test results in order to determine if excessive pressure exists (pressure regulator required) or if insufficient pressure exists and as a result a booster pump is required for the building.

c. Verify municipal water supply pressure and install pressure regulator if maximum daily pressure exceeds 80 psig.

d. Domestic water piping shall be copper tube type L inside the building and type K outside. Shall comply with ASTM B88.

e. All solder shall be lead-free.

3. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping

a. Provide sanitary waste and vent piping, fittings, connections and support from the fixture traps, through the building, and to the points of connection in accordance with the California Plumbing Code.

b. Sanitary waste and vent piping to be either cast iron no-hub or copper DWV. Cast iron soil pipe shall comply with CISPI 310 Standard.

c. Cast Iron Soil Pipe - Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the Engineer.

(a) Manufacturers:

(i) AB&I Foundry

(ii) Charlotte Pipe

(iii) Tyler Pipe

(b) Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

(i) Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

(ii) Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.

(iii) Couplings: Hubless pipe and fittings shall be joined by a heavy-duty coupling. Approved manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp All 125 or MG Couplings

(iv) Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

a. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.

b. NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.

Page 53: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 53

4. Storm Drainage Piping

a. Provide storm drainage piping from roof drains, scuppers and gutters and ground floor courtyard as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the California Plumbing Code.

b. Storm drainage piping to be either cast iron no-hub. Cast iron soil pipe shall comply with CISPI 310 Standard.

c. Cast Iron Soil Pipe - Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute or receive prior approval of the Engineer.

(a) Manufacturers:

(i) AB&I Foundry

(ii) Charlotte Pipe

(iii) Tyler Pipe

d. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.

(i) Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

(ii) Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.

(iii) Couplings: Hubless pipe and fittings shall be joined by a heavy-duty coupling. Approved manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Clamp All 125 or MG Couplings

(iv) Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C 564 rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

1. Heavy-Duty, Type 304, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stainless-steel shield; stainless-steel bands; and sleeve.

a. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 3-inch- wide shield with 4 bands.

b. NPS 5 to NPS 10: 4-inch- wide shield with 6 bands.

5. Condensate

a. Hard copper tube, Type M, copper pressure fittings and solder joints.

6. Trap Primer

a. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H).

7. Air Removal:

a. Provide high point vents and low point drains to facilitate drainage of the water systems.

8. Strainers:

a. C.M. Bailey, Mueller, or equal. Cast iron or bronze "Y-pattern" body to match piping material. Perforated money screen, size of perforations to suit service or per plans.

b. Provide gate valve with hose bib adapter for all strainers.

c. Provide strainers at the inlet to all pumps, and entry to any flow control (Griswold) valves.

Page 54: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 54

9. Gauges:

a. Fixed gauges: Provide fixed temperature gauges (Weksler Type AF) at heat exchanger inlet and outlet. Provide a single fixed pressure gauge (Weksler Model BA13P) with valved connections to inlets and outlets of all pumps. Boilers to have factory mounted temperature and pressure gauge.

b. Pressure/Temperature Test Plugs: Provide "Pete’s Plug" fittings, solid brass with valve core or neoprene (Nordel on hot water lines) fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket. Provide 2 sets of pressure gauge adapters with 1/8" OD probe, and 2 sets of five inch stem pocket testing thermometers '0-220 degrees F.). Install test plugs at inlet and outlet of all heat exchange devices including where fixed gauges are installed.

10. Piping Flexible Connectors:

a. Double sphere plastic type flexible piping connections at pumps shall be provided if necessary to prevent objectionable vibrations from being transmitted to the structure.

b. For steel piping systems, Victaulic fittings may be used to allow for vibration isolation and misalignment at Contractor's option.

11. Valves:

a. Nibco or equal.

b. Ball, butterfly or check valves only.

c. Triple duty valves shall not be used.

d. Ball valves may be standard port.

e. Butterfly valves used for balancing shall have infinite position handles with memory stop. Butterfly valves shall have removable seats, and the stem shall be fastened to the disc so that no liquid can reach the stem. External fasteners such as roll pins, cotters, keys, or set screws shall not be allowed.

f. Provide manual gear operator for butterfly valves 8" and larger.

g. Extended neck model for all insulated lines.

h. Provide chain operators on all valves located higher than 7 feet above access level.

12. Pipe Supports:

a. Kin-line, Superstrut, or equal.

b. Where pipe is insulated, protect insulation at hangers by installing a 22 gauge shield and clamp sized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the hanger. For piping 2" and larger, provide 360 degree high density calcium silicate insert within shield.

c. For vibration isolation refer to section 1.14.

13. Escutcheons: Provide stainless steel escutcheons at piping penetrations of walls where exposed public view and required for proper appearance. Provide galvanized steel escutcheons at penetrations of masonry walls elsewhere. Escutcheons not generally required at drywall penetrations where not exposed to public view.

14. Sleeves:

Page 55: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 55

a. Provide sleeves where pipes pass through floors above grade, roofs, poured-in-place masonry walls, and exterior walls.

b. Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe, except sleeves for concealed piping through floors not in structural members may be 25-gauge galvanized sheet metal.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops For Plumbing Piping

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Accessories and fittings to be used in the Plumbing piping distribution system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide expansion and contraction fittings or loops on vertical and horizontal hot water piping for thermal growth, that are capable of absorbing growth or contraction and seismic drift (See Structural).

2. Provide expansion joint in piping at each crossover of an expansion joint.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures

PART 1 – General:

1. Plumbing Fixtures:

a. Any deviations from the fixtures specified in the narrative shall be approved by the Architect prior to the procurement and installation of the fixtures.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide plumbing fixtures for restrooms and kitchens in accordance with the California Plumbing Code. Fixtures to be ADA compliant where indicated.

2. Provide low-water use plumbing fixtures as indicated in the specifications and drawings that meet or exceed EPACT standards.

3. All plumbing fixtures to be vitreous china, white, unless otherwise specified.

4. Toilets to be flushometer, wall hung water closets.

5. Shower stalls to be pre-fabricated units, and ADA compliant where indicated.

6. The project has a LEED goal of Silver under LEED for New Construction 2009. The point breakout is 4 points for 40% water use reduction, 3 points for 35% water use reduction and 2 points for water use reduction of 20%. To get a 40% reduction in domestic water use the fixtures would need to be 1.28 gallon per flush (gpf) water closets, zero water consumption urinals, 0.35 gpm lavatory faucets, and 1.5 gpm showers. If either the urinal or the lavatory faucet flowrate is changed to 0.125 gpf (urinal) or 0.5 gpm (lavatory) the percentage would be reduced to 38% and the points received would be reduced to 3. If both the urinal and the lavatory faucet were changed as described above the percentage of water use reduction would be 36% and the points awarded would still be 3 points. If the contractor deviates from the

Page 56: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 56

basis of design which is 40% water use reduction the Architect must approve this prior to the selection, procurement and installation of fixtures.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 10 06 Plumbing Piping Specialties

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Requirements of Plumbing accessories.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide plumbing specialties as indicated on the drawings including hose bibs, cleanouts, floor drains and floor sinks

2. All floor drains and floor sinks to be installed with trap primers.

3. Provide backflow prevention devices at all points where domestic water connects to industrial water and irrigation water systems.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

SECTION 22 05 01 Instrumentation and Controls

PART 1 – General:

1. Section Includes: Devices and programming.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Refer to Division 23 "Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Systems" for detailed control system requirements.

2. Coordinate with HVAC controls contractor as required to meet the specifications for system control, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Booster Water System and Sump Pump status alarms.

PART 3 – Execution: Not Used

DIVISION 23 – HVAC SECTION 23 05 00 HVAC General Requirements

PART 1 –General:

1. HVAC systems shall be designed with the following minimum pressure, friction and energy efficiency requirements. The contractor is highly encouraged to provide low energy system designs beyond those described herein. In many cases, increased energy efficiencies may be realized by careful attention to selection of equipment and system design, beyond the guidelines set herein, at no cost impact to the project. Any modification of design criteria or system approach shall adhere to efficiency requirements herein.

2. Dry Side Systems:

Page 57: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 57

a) Supply, exhaust and return ducts shall be designed with a maximum of 0.05”w.g. static pressure drop per 100ft of duct. Lined ducts shall be sized to 0.05” wg static pressure drop per 100ft of duct using the net free internal area, for duct sizing. Flex ducts shall not exceed 5 feet in length and shall occur only at connections to concealed diffusers or grilles.

a. Outside air intake and relief louvers shall be designed for maximum 400 fpm air velocity.

b) Maximum external static pressure from rooftop systems shall not exceed 1.00" (includes pressure drop from and back to rooftop unit discharge to air outlets) without written approval from Integral Group, Inc.

c) Maximum velocity through unducted plenum return elements shall not exceed 700 fpm.

d) Duct layout shall emphasize the use of 45 degree branch takeoffs and wye (“pant-leg”) fittings for duct splitting. Whenever a 90 degree bend is required, round duct with a minimum 1 ½ times radius is preferred. If this is not possible, a rectangular duct with turning vanes shall be used.

e) Care shall be taken for all exposed ducts to preserve clean lines and appearance. Ducts shall be connected using internal sleeves and any visible excess duct sealant shall be removed quickly after assembly. Ducts shall be free of any dents, dings or other markings.

f) Fire smoke dampers and backdraft dampers shall be sized for a pressure drop less than 0.02” w.g.

g) Locate AC units so that supply air discharge is directly over shafts where ever if possible and shafts are shown. Exposed ductwork on the roof should be avoided.

h) All rooftop HVAC units shall be balanced to allow operation at lowest possible static pressure that will deliver design cfms.

i) Airside balancing must be conducted so that at least one balancing damper is fully open. Air systems with all dampers partially closed indicates a system that requires a lower fan RPM and this condition is not acceptable.

j) Forward actual/final air flows and static pressures to T-24 modeler for the purposes of tightening the model results.

3. Wet Side Systems

a. Size hydronic piping with a maximum of 0.8' w.g. head loss per 100 feet of pipe.

b. Piping into hydronic pumps: provide 5 pipe diameters of straight pipe going into the pump suction inlet for smooth flow.

c. Use long radius elbows for all elbows.

d. Use wye and lateral wye fittings for branches instead of tee's or taps.

e. The building is a 27-story high rise. Fittings, piping and valves shall be sized to handle working pressures including dynamic and hydrostatic pressure.

4. System Zoning:

Page 58: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 58

a. All areas of the building shall be zoned as required to prevent non-uniform temperatures in a space due to variable heat gain from outdoor exposure, variation in occupancy density, etc. Each zone shall have its own zone controls and thermostat.

b. Exterior and interior spaces shall be separately zoned.

c. Spaces with different exposures shall be separately zoned.

d. All enclosed corner rooms shall be separately zoned.

e. Rooms shall be grouped onto the same zone only if space functions and orientation are similar. For example, a conference room shall not be on the same zone as an office. Individual spaces with exterior facades oriented towards a different direction shall not be zoned together.

f. Each conference or training room larger than approximately 200 square feet shall be separately zoned.

g. No more than 4 private offices shall be served by a single zone.

h. Support (copy/coffee) rooms shall be served by separate zones. (Cooling-only or exhaust-only is acceptable for this room. Adjacent corridors and non-critical spaces may also be served by this zone.)

i. No zone shall serve more than approximately 1200 square feet of conditioned space (excluding non-critical spaces such as corridors and storage rooms).

5. Codes: Project shall comply with all applicable standards including but not limited to those listed in Section “1.4 Definitions, Codes & Standards” of this document.

6. Refer to narrative for Project location and design temperatures.

7. Structural Design Criteria:

a. Wind Load (Commercial): ......... (coordinate with structural engineer)

b. Live Roof Load: .......................... (coordinate with structural engineer)

c. Dead Roof Load: ....................... (coordinate with structural engineer)

d. Seismic: ..................................... (coordinate with structural engineer)

8. Interior Design Conditions:

a. At nighttime, unoccupied temperature setback to 60°F may be used when appropriate. The summer temperature design conditions may be exceeded for a number of hours per year, due to outside temperatures exceeding the Title 24 0.5% design conditions. While designing to the Title 24 0.5% conditions by definition indicates that design setpoints shall be exceeded during peak periods, typical design often requires a minimal amount of oversizing so that control is never lost. Title 24 requires the design uses the ASHRAE 0.4% design conditions. This results in small amounts of risk while resulting in significant first cost and operating cost savings.

9. Hours of Operation

a. The following spaces operate 24-hours and shall be individually and independently conditioned:

(a) Elevator Machine Room Heat Exhaust

(b) Electrical Room Heat Exhaust

Page 59: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 59

(c) Main and Floor Level MPOE/Telecom Rooms Heat Exhaust

(d) Tenant Floor Restroom and Janitor Closet Exhaust

(e) Trash Room Exhaust

10. Minimum Ventilation Rates:

a. For mechanically ventilated spaces, airflow to these spaces shall be at a minimum in compliance with Title 24 and ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2013, plus an additional 30% to meet LEED requirements, with a minimum of MERV 13 filtration on the outside air supply. Naturally ventilated spaces shall at a minimum be designed to comply with section 5.1 of this standard as well as Title 24 and LEED requirements.

b. CO2 sensors shall be used in all densely occupied areas as defined by LEED to modulate fan based ventilation systems. Outdoor airflow monitoring stations shall also be provided for mechanical ventilation systems serving non-densely occupied spaces to ensure that minimum amounts of ventilation air are provided to these spaces. There shall be provisions to control airflows in these spaces based on measured CO2 concentrations within the limits described in this document.

c. Separation distances between outdoor air intakes and contaminant sources shall be at a minimum in accordance with Title 24. Greater separation distances are encouraged, however.

d. Exhaust fans shall not terminate within an equipment well.

11. Air Filtration

a. Design Minimum Air Filtration:

(a) All mechanically ventilated spaces:

(i) MERV 13 (85% minimum ASHRAE 52-76) 12" V-cell mini-pleat type final filter (4" allowable only if 12" not available for specified equipment).

(ii) MERV 8 (30% minimum ASHRAE 52-76) 2" Angled pre-filter.

12. Internal Gains

a. Diversity factors: Loads to each room or area shall be based on the densities listed in each section below. However, central fan systems and cooling plant may be sized based on the total load multiplied by the diversity factor listed. Where no diversity factor is listed, assume a diversity factor of 1.0.

b. Occupancy Heat Gain

(a) Occupancy shall be based on architectural plans and verified with Architect and Owner during design phase.

(b) Occupancy shall be based on the architectural plans and typical office occupancy for tenant spaces, number of chairs indicated on furniture plans for conference rooms and waiting areas, and on the number of workstations in open office areas. The following density values shall be used where furniture layout is unavailable or more detailed information has not been provided by Architect. Assume 1 person per private office and 2 people per executive (large) office. The density data in the table below should be used for bid purposes only. All occupant densities shall be verified during system design.

Page 60: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 60

13. Electrical Heat Gain

a. Coordinate with electric engineer of record for lighting design power density and controls.

b. Use actual lighting design to determine heat gain from lighting. The densities in the table are for estimates only; actual loads will be obtained for final design. For future tenant spaces, heat gain shall not exceed code allowable densities. Where diversity factors are not provided assume 1.0.

c. Infiltration

(a) Assumed air leakage rate of 0.1 cfm/sf of façade area on two windward adjacent façade orientations.

14. Envelope Criteria

a. Envelope criteria listed below are minimum entire assembly performance values used for load calculations and equipment sizing purposes only, more stringent requirements shall be followed wherever listed, see MEP narrative and Architect's documents.

b. Two different glazing products are being considered for this project. The baseline glazing is a double-pane Low-E product with thermally broken aluminum frame. The improved glazing alternate is a triple-element glazing with thermally broken aluminum frame with improved U-value and SHGC. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Architect and adjust their load calculations based on the final product selected. The values presented here are preliminary and shall be used for planning purposes only.

c. The heat transfer conductance's of building envelope in most areas (BTU/sq.ft./hr.°F). U-factors, U-Values or R-Values shall be reported as composite (total assembly) values.

(a) Glazing U-Factor:

(i) Baseline Double Pane Low-E: 0.45

(ii) Alternate Triple Element: 0.20

(b) Glazing SHGC: 0.3

(i) Baseline Double Pane Low-E: 0.38

(ii) Alternate Triple Element: 0.28

(c) Opaque Assemblies: Ignore shading devices (drapes or blinds) in load calculations.

(i) Exterior Walls: Baseline R-25; Improved R-30.

(ii) Roof: Baseline R-30; Improved R-40.

(iii) Floor: Baseline R-5; Improved R-10.

(d) Windows shall be tested, verified, and labeled in accordance with mandatory provision of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Section 5.4 and all referenced standards therein.

(e) Contractor is responsible for verifying conditions and making corrections to load calculation where envelope varies from these values.

15. Acoustic & Vibrations

a. Emergency Generator

Page 61: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 61

(a) At a minimum acoustic louvers are required for the generator heat exhaust and intake. Provisions shall be made for a minimum 12" deep acoustic louver. Additional clearance for silencer may be required.

(b) Parking areas shall be designed not to exceed 60 dBA during generator operation.

(c) All generator intakes and exhaust locations noise criteria shall be acoustically addressed per acoustic consultant's recommendations.

b. Acoustic Submittals

(a) Duct Liner and Thermal Insulation: provide location and thickness of duct liners and thermal insulation.

(b) Acoustic Louvers. Provide location, model number and size for all louvers, include manufacturer's data sheets listing noise performance and ability to reduce exterior environmental noise.

(c) Air Velocities. Indicate air velocity at all louvers, dampers, inlets and outlets to the building.

(d) Duct and Plenum Sections. Provide submittals for all duct mains and plenums with dimensions for duct, linings and insulation. Note sheet metal type, thickness, gauge and whether dimensions are clear inside or total.

(e) Cooling Towers. Provide spring vibration isolation for cooling towers and list sound data in submittals to acoustic consultant.

(f) Fans. List acoustic performance data for fans. Provide barrier

(g) Equipment Details. Provide details illustrating vibration isolation approach for each piece of equipment whether, hanging, spring isolated inertia pad, or frame mounted with springs or neoprene pads.

(h) General Equipment Submittals. Provide manufacturer's published sound data with referenced standards and certifications to include octave band sound power levels at inlet, discharge, and casing, for operations at typical design load.

c. General Acoustic Requirements

(a) 2007 ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications Table 48 Selection Guide for Vibration Isolation shall be followed for appropriate selection of acoustic and vibration isolation.

(b) The design of the mechanical systems shall consider any limitations of the structure, and the presence of program areas with restrictive sound criteria. Particular attention shall be given to the location and isolation of heavy equipment, including air conditioning units, and exhaust fans.

(c) Duct noise, including noise generated by fans, excessive air speed, excessive pressure drop, dampers, turning vanes, terminal boxes, resonance, and pressure fluctuations shall be considered. Low pressure-drop ducting shall reduce sound problems throughout. All air diffusers and grilles shall have a target of NC 25 or lower. There shall be an absolute maximum of NC 40 for the room. Pipe noise and vibration transfer due to pump vibration and excessive pipe velocity shall also be considered. The low pressure drop design approach being taken typically eliminates most sound traps from the supply side.

Page 62: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 62

d. All internal duct lining shall be installed in complete accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) Duct Liner Application Standard.

(a) Duct lining shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1071.

(b) Mechanical fasteners shall conform to Mechanical Fastener Standard MF-1-1971 from SMACNA.

(c) Duct liner adhesive shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 916.

(d) Internal duct lining shall be 1” unless otherwise called out, 1.5 lb/cu.ft. minimum density and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90-A and 90-B.

(e) Fasteners and washers of the specified type and length shall be used assuring no greater than 10% compression of the acoustical liner thickness.

e. All fan duct connections should be flexible.

f. There should be a minimum straight duct run of 2 duct diameters on flow changing elements and elbows before and after each element.

g. Flow changing elements and elbows should not be used closer than two duct diameters from the outlet or inlet of a fan or a diffuser, register or grille.

h. Supply ducts immediately downstream of fans should have the same dimensions as the fan discharge opening for a length of 1.5 times the largest discharge duct dimension.

i. Transition sections of duct should have slopes not greater than 1 in 4.

j. Flexible duct used for connecting a branch duct to a register, grille, diffuser or to VAV unit should be insulated and should be no more than two duct diameters in lineal length.

k. Local air-handling equipment, such as fan coil units, fan powered boxes, etc., should not be installed in the ceiling plenums of Acoustically Important (NC<35) spaces. If equipment must be installed in Acoustically Important Spaces, it is probable that significant noise control, such as gypsum board enclosures or ceilings, will be required to meet the background noise criteria.

l. Diffusers, registers and grilles should be chosen for a total performance Noise Criteria (NC) value of at least five points below the room NC goal (shown in Table 2). The manufacturer’s NC rating of the selected device, used for comparison with the NC goals, should include the NC contributions of all individual units within the space along with all appropriate adjustments for face velocity, device length, device area, the presence of dampers (non-critical spaces only), the number of devices in the room and the “room adjustment”. Manufacturer’s NC values must not contain more than a 10 dB “room adjustment” or “room correction” factor.

m. The air volume at a VAV system fan should be controlled by a variable speed motor or variable drive wheel.

n. Local air-handling equipment, such as fan coil units, fan powered boxes, etc., installed in ceiling plenums will most likely require noise control, such as mass-loaded lagging or gypsum board enclosures or ceilings, to meet the background noise criteria.

Page 63: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 63

o. All duct silencers, if absolutely required, should be sized to a maximum of 0.2” pressure drop including any system effect due to an irregular duct connection. An allowance should be made for a minimum of 3 duct diameters of straight duct on each end of the silencer. However, duct silencers should be avoided.

p. Acoustically Critical (NC<30) Areas:

(a) Horizontal discharge, fan units should be used where possible.

(b) The first elbow in the supply ductwork from the fan should direct the air in the same direction as the fan scroll and should be a radiused type with a minimum 6” radius, or the elbow should have rugged turning vanes extending for the full arc of the elbow.

(c) Where possible, balancing dampers should not be located within 20 feet of any register, grille or diffuser.

(d) Registers, grilles and diffusers should have an acoustically lined branch duct connected to them off the main duct of at least 4 duct diameters in length. Devices installed directly into ducts should be avoided.

(e) Return air ceiling plenums should be avoided. All return air should be ducted.

(f) Use of flexible duct should be avoided.

(g) The only ductwork that should be routed in the ceiling of a critical space should be ductwork servicing that space.

q. Acoustically Important (NC 30-35) Areas:

(a) The first elbow in the supply ductwork from the fan should direct the air in the same direction as the fan scroll and should be a radiused type with a minimum 6” radius, or the elbow should have rugged turning vanes extending for the full arc of the elbow.

(b) Ceiling plenums may be used for return air, provided return air grilles have an acoustically lined “boot” with an elbow and a minimum of 5 feet of straight lined duct attached, to prevent crosstalk and miscellaneous plenum noise from intruding into the space.

(c) Use of flexible duct above an acoustical tile ceiling should be avoided.

(d) Balancing dampers should not be located within 8 feet of any supply register, grille or diffuser.

r. Maximum Air Velocities (per 2013 ASHRAE Fundamentals CH 47.8):

s. Noise Criteria for Various Spaces:

16. Miscellaneous Design Criteria

a. Ceiling clearance: Coordinate minimum clearance below any mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping, etc. with architect.

b. Fan coils and heat pumps shall not be located over offices, conference rooms, or other noise sensitive and access sensitive spaces without coordination and approval by Architect. (Locate over corridors and normally unoccupied spaces wherever possible.)

c. Do not locate hydronic piping or ductwork over server rooms, elevator machine rooms or electrical rooms.

Page 64: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 64

d. Architectural shafts and plenums:

(a) Non-ducted architectural shafts shall only be allowed for return air risers. All supplies and exhausts shall be fully ducted. (For example, toilet exhausts shall not use the shaft as a duct).

(b) All return air transfer across rated corridors shall be sheet metal where allowed by code. Only where code prohibits penetrations of rated wall shall rated enclosures be used instead of sheet metal ductwork.

e. Walls around all conference, meeting, and training rooms shall be full height except where noted otherwise. Provide acoustically lined return air transfer ducts accordingly.

f. All new motors shall be NEMA premium efficiency or ECM (when available), those powering emergency-only equipment.

g. Duct and piping insulation: All insulation that shall be exposed to an airstream shall have a protective non-PVC jacket or non-fibrous coating that shall eliminate the insulation from coming into direct contact with the airstream.

h. Condensate pans: All condensate pans shall be double sloped and gravity drained.

i. Toilet rooms shall be exhausted to the outdoors.

j. Exhaust all copy rooms and kitchenette areas to the outdoors.

k. Exhaust or otherwise condition IDF and elevator machine rooms.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Work Included: Furnish and install a complete, fully automatic HVAC system as described by the complete set of specifications and project narrative. This project shall be ‘Design/Build’. The chosen HVAC contractor shall be responsible for preparing a complete working set of documents, including but not limited to the preparation of the permit set of drawings and shop drawings.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used SECTION 23 05 50 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Limitation on materials used.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Vinyl and PVC products shall be avoided to the extent reasonably possible for this project.

2. Water based sealants and mastics only shall be used on ductwork. All sealant products shall be no- or low- VOC.

3. All solder shall be lead-free.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 65: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 65

SECTION 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Motor requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide NEMA premium efficiency motors, as required by equipment specified elsewhere.

2. Electronic commutating motors (ECM) shall be provided where appropriate and additional savings beyond NEMA premium rated motors can be achieved.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 19 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Meter output and accuracy requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. All meters shall provide an analog output and be compatible with the building energy management system.

2. Accuracy shall be 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 1 percent.

3. Meter display shall be alphanumeric indicating current flow rate.

4. Current Output: 4-20ma

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 05 50 00 Hangars and Supports

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Mounting requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Mount all equipment and accessories according to manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable codes.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Restraint requirements and requested submittals.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide seismic restraints to meet requirements of SMACNA. Restraints shall not short-circuit vibration isolation systems under normal operation.

Page 66: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 66

2. Design restraints shall be per code or SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems".

3. Vibration isolation shall be provided for the vertically mounted exhaust fans and all other applicable mechanical equipment.

4. Issue table of vibration isolation systems (include types) for fan units, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, pumps for hydronic piping, and associated pipes and other equipment requiring vibration isolation for review. Provide cutsheets for the design team to review.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Type of equipment requiring identification.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide mechanical identification of all mechanical equipment and accessories.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 07 13 Duct Insulation

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Locations, amounts, and type of insulation required in the Mechanical distribution system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Johns Manville, Roxul, Klima Duct, or equal.

2. Insulation shall:

a. Meet minimum thickness requirements of Chapter 2-53 of Title 24 and UMW 604.1.

b. Meet mold, humidity, and erosion resistance requirements of UMW Standard 6-1

c. Have flame spread not more than 15 and smoke developed index of not more than 20.

d. Be an incombustible material per ASTM E 136.

e. Thermal conductivity (per ASTM C 177): 100°F = 0.29; 200°F = 0.36; 300°F = 0.44.

f. Have a nominal density of 4 lb./ft3

g. Must be water wicking resistant and non-hygroscopic.

3. Ductwork shall be insulated/lined as follows:

a. In concealed space, including ceiling plenum: Shall be insulated with 1-1/2" insulation, with aluminum foil facing.

Page 67: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 67

b. Exposed to outdoors: Shall be internally lined with Klima Duct Liner KDL 035, or equal, 2" thick. (Exposed ductwork should be avoided).

c. At fan inlet and discharge, where required for acoustical attenuation: Shall be internally lined with Klima Duct Liner KDL 035, or equal,1" thick.

d. Return air ducts, exhaust air ducts, internally lined ducts, and ducts exposed in conditioned spaces need not be insulated.

e. Longitudinal joints shall be stapled. For rectangular ducts exceeding 24 inches, insulation on the bottom shall be additionally secured with adhesive.

4. Exposed insulation: Insulation exposed to weather shall be protected by a smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket, minimum 0.016 inch thick, secured 3" on center, overlapped at joints and sealed watertight.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 07 16 HVAC Equipment Insulation

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Locations, amounts, and type of insulation required at Mechanical equipment.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Hot Equipment: Hot equipment shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick mineral wool blanket, and secured with wire or bands. Finish per manufacturer’s recommendations and as required for a neat job. Do not insulate expansion tank or chemical feeder (if any). For outdoor equipment, insulation shall be integral to casing and weather protection system.

a. Thermal resistance: 4.2 hr.ft2 °F/BTU per inch at 75°F; ASTM C518

b. Surface burning characteristics: flame spread index = 0; smoke development index = 0; ASTM E84.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 07 19 HVAC Pipe Insulation

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Locations, amounts, and type of insulation required in the Mechanical hydronic system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide weatherproof non-vinyl/PVC jacket for all piping exposed to the outdoors.

2. Hot water piping shall be insulated with fiberglass molded pipe insulation with all service jacket, thickness as follows:

a. 1" thick up to 2" pipe, 1-1/2" thick from 2-1/2" and larger pipe.

b. Fittings on pipe over 1/2" shall be insulated with fiberglass and finished with one piece non-PVC fitting cover. Valves, flanges and irregular surfaces two inches and over shall be insulated with oversized pipe covering with ASJ

Page 68: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 68

jacket with self sealing lap. Exposed ends shall be finished with four ounce canvas jacket.

c. Insulation shall be preformed.

d. Operating temperature limit = 1200°F (ASTM C447.

e. ASTM C547, ASTM C585, ASTM C795/C871/C692, ASTM C1338, MIL-I-24244

f. Flame Spread: 25/50 or less; ASTM E84.

g. Thermal conductivity (ASTM C518): 75°F = 0.23; 100°F = 0.25; 200°F = 0.3.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 21 13 Hydronic Piping

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Acceptable pipe materials and location for routing.

PART 2 –Products:

1. All piping must be made in the USA and labeled as such.

2. Piping materials shall be Schedule 40 Black steel or Type "L" Copper at contractor's option.

3. Joint System: For steel, welded or grooved (Victaulic). For copper, 95/5 tin/antimony solder.

4. Piping may be run exposed on the roof provided:

a. It is supported 18" above the roof (for re-roofing) on seismically braced struts.

b. Insulation is protected from weather.

c. The overall height of piping is not visible from the street level or from any window.

d. It does not interfere with access to any equipment on the roof.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 21 23 Hydronic Pumps

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Pump performance requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Hydronic pumps shall be bronze fitted centrifugal pumps as manufactured by Bell and Gossett, Taco or equal.

2. 1750 rpm maximum motor speed.

3. All pumps shall have variable speed drives with integral starters.

Page 69: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 69

4. In general, pumps shall be inline-type, self-supporting, with shaft positioned vertically. Details by Contractor, support and isolation shall be provided as appropriate.

5. All pumps shall meet energy efficiency criteria described in Part 1.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 21 14 Hydronic Specialties

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Accessories and fittings to be used in the Mechanical piping distribution system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Piping system components shall be selected for maximum design operating pressure based on static head, shutoff pump head, and pressure relief valve setting.

2. Water Treatment Systems:

a. Provide manufacturer recommended chemical water treatment for all Condenser Water, Hot Water and Chilled Water systems.

3. Air Removal (closed systems):

a. Provide manual air vents at system high points with shut-off cock and pipe vent to nearest drain when located inside. of building. Air vents in tenant ceiling space need not be piped to drains.

b. Air pursers (scoops). or centrifugal air separators need be provided only at contractors option.

4. Strainers:

a. C.M. Bailey, Mueller, or equal. Cast iron or bronze "Y-pattern" body to match piping material. Perforated money screen, size of perforations to suit service or per plans.

b. Provide gate valve with hose bib adapter for all strainers.

c. Provide strainers at the inlet to all pumps, and entry to any flow control (Griswold) valves.

5. Gauges:

a. Fixed gauges: Provide a single fixed pressure gauge (Weksler Model BA13P) with valved connections to inlets and outlets of all pumps.

6. Piping Flexible Connectors:

a. Double sphere plastic type flexible piping connections at air handlers shall be provided if necessary to prevent objectionable vibrations from being transmitted to the structure.

b. For steel piping systems, Victaulic fittings may be used to allow for vibration isolation and misalignment at Contractor's option.

7. Valves:

a. Nibco or equal.

b. Ball, butterfly or check valves only.

Page 70: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 70

c. Triple duty valves shall not be used.

d. Ball valves may be standard port.

e. Butterfly valves used for balancing shall have infinite position handles with memory stop. Butterfly valves shall have removable seats, and the stem shall be fastened to the disc so that no liquid can reach the stem. External fasteners such as roll pins, cotters, keys, or set screws shall not be allowed.

f. Provide manual gear operator for butterfly valves 8" and larger.

g. Extended neck model for all insulated lines.

h. Provide chain operators on all valves located higher than 7 feet above access level.

8. Pipe Supports:

a. Kin-line, Superstrut, or equal.

b. Piping for hydronic systems should be vibration isolated.

(a) All fluid filled and hydronic pipes throughout the building must be vibration isolated from the building. Specify neoprene collars for pipes at all pipe supports at horizontal runs. These vibration isolation requirements do not apply to inert or horizontally supported insulated piping.

(b) Pipes should not directly contact framing, ductwork, structure, gypsum board, or other pipes. Use acoustical sleeves where pipes where pipes penetrate acoustically rated walls. Provide detail of penetrations for typical conditions where occurs.

(c) Pipe risers shall be isolated from structure using 40 durometer neoprene or rubber pads under load bearing plate.

9. Escutcheons: Provide stainless steel escutcheons at piping penetrations of walls where exposed public view and required for proper appearance.

10. Sleeves:

a. Provide sleeves where pipes pass through floors above grade, roofs, poured-in-place masonry walls, and exterior walls.

b. Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe, except sleeves for concealed piping through floors not in structural members may be 25-gauge galvanized sheet metal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 16 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Accessories and fittings to be used in the Mechanical piping distribution system.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide expansion and contraction fittings or loops on vertical and horizontal hydronic piping for thermal growth, that are capable of absorbing growth or contraction and seismic drift (See Structural).

Page 71: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 71

2. Provide expansion joint in piping at each cross-over of an expansion joint.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 14 Variable Frequency Controllers

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: VFD performance and warranty requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. ABB, Graham.

2. Electrical Characteristics.

a. Efficiency shall be not less than 97% at rated voltage, current, and frequency and fundamental power factor shall not be less than 98% at all speeds and loads.

b. VFD shall maintain line noise (voltage harmonics) on the input electrical system at or below levels specified in IEEE 519 for a "General System." Manufacturer shall include in submittals a harmonic distortion analysis (IEEE 519, 3%) for this particular jobsite. Provide RLC tuned filters as required to comply with the above requirements. Provide as a minimum 3-phase line reactors, 3% impedance type or as required to meet local utility and possible rebate specifications.

3. Features and Accessories.

a. Plain language LCD display (code numbers not acceptable). All set-up parameters, indications, faults, warnings, and other information must be displayed in words, not codes.

b. Displays and meters for the following: Output voltage, output frequency, motor rpm, motor current, motor watts, speed signal input, last three faults.

c. HOA switch and speed potentiometer.

d. Input line fuses.

e. Adjustable or multiple carrier frequencies up to 12 kHz. Drive shall be capable of full motor rated current at all carrier frequencies.

f. Isolated 4-20 mA or 0-10 Vdc speed signal input.

g. Analog outputs for kW and speed.

h. Digital outputs for alarm and motor on/off status. Latter shall be based on field adjustable motor current.

i. Auto-restart after trip due to overcorrect, under-voltage, over-voltage, or over-temperature upon correction of causative condition. Include a maximum of 3 restart attempts for over-current only, with VFD shutting down and requiring manual restart after the third attempt. The attempt counter shall reset after 10 minutes of successful operation.

j. Provide interface with DDC system for status points, or hard-wire points listed.

k. VFD shall have 5% line reactor for input line conditioning.

Page 72: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 72

l. Comply with the applicable requirements of the latest standards of ANSI, NEMA, National Electric Code (NEC), FCC Subpart J of Part 15, and IEEE 519-1992.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 74 13 Packaged Outdoor Air Handling Units

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: AHU acceptable manufacturers and component requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Manufacturer: Energy Labs, Envirotec, Aaon, Carrier Corporation, Trane Inc, or equal.

2. Backward inclined, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan with airfoil-type blades.

3. Filter Box: Section with filter guides, access doors from both sides, for side loading with gaskets and blank-off plates.

4. Filter Media: UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II, approved by local authorities.

5. Extended Surface: Filter box with holding frames and blank-off sheets, extended surface retained high efficiency media filters with 80 percent dust spot efficiency.

6. Filter Gages:

a. 3-1/2 inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case with static pressure tips.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 81 01 Terminal Heat Transfer Units

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Terminal unit component requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Fan Coil Units

a. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Multispeed mof VFD-rated motor with integral thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.

b. Where ECM not available, provide centrifugal fan, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor, with airfoil-type blades.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 73: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 73

SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Ductwork materials, length requirements, joints and sealants requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel, except as allowed below. The gauge of metal, type of joints, hanging, reinforcing, and other. Details of construction shall conform to the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Pressure classes shall be as required by the fan system. For the purpose of this section, "medium pressure" herein refers to ductwork in main shafts. "Low pressure" herein refers to all other ductwork.

2. Fiberglass duct: not allowed for transfer ducts.

3. Flexible Duct:

a. Flexible duct shall be listed by UL under Class One air duct and UL 181. All flexible ducts, even low pressure ducts, shall be 4" pressure class (to increase longevity).

b. Flexible duct length shall occur on low pressure duct systems only and shall not exceed 5 feet in length. Flexible duct is acceptable only at connection to supply diffusers or as a flexible connection over seismic or expansion joints. All flexible duct shall be oversized as specified under Design Parameters. Ducts shall be supported as required by the 1994 UMC.

c. Flexible duct shall consist of a vinyl or zinc coated steel helix, solid liner and outer sheathing. Aluminum duct is also acceptable provided noise criteria can be met.

d. Flexible duct on supply systems shall include 1" insulation, refer to Section 230713 for insulation requirements.

4. Joints in rectangular sheet metal duct:

a. Joints in medium pressure ductwork shall be "Fabriduct T.D.C." or Duct-Mate. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh.

b. Joints in low pressure ductwork shall be "Fabriduct T.D.C." or Duct-Mate except that ducts under 19" longest side may be "S" and drive. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh.

5. Rectangular and medium pressure duct bends greater than 45 degrees shall be curved sections, the center line radius of which shall not be less than 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. Where required due to space constraints, short radius elbows with duct splitters or square elbows with turning vanes may be used. Round duct elbows may be adjustable type on low pressure systems, witch gores sealed for systems operating in excess of 1” w.c..

6. Ductwork Sealing:

a. Ductwork shall be sealed per SMACNA sealing classes as follows:

(a) Medium pressure: Seal class A.

(b) Low pressure: Seal class C.

Page 74: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 74

(i) Duct sealant shall be Foster’s 32-14 "High Velocity Duct Sealant", Hard cast, or equal. Pressure applied tapes are not acceptable as the sole sealant.

(ii) Gasketed joints (e.g. Duct-Mate and T.D.C.) and longitudinal joints with sealant installed during fabrication do not require additional sealing.

(iii) Flexible ducts shall be connected using Panduit strap on the inner liner, sealed with tape, then the outer liner shall be sealed with tape.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Smoke, fire, and barometric dampers.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Smoke and fire dampers:

a. Dampers shall be UL rated per the UBC.

b. Provide as required by UBC 713.10 and 713.11.

c. Fire dampers shall be dynamically rated as required by UMC 605.2 and shall be Type B for duct or face velocities in excess of 1200 fpm, and Type A otherwise.

d. Smoke dampers shall be air-foil type when duct or face velocities are in excess of 1800 fpm.

e. Provide fire-stats connected to actuator in lieu of fusible link for slow closing.

f. See "Scope of Work Coordination" for coordination of smoke damper electrical interlock requirements.

2. Barometric Relief Dampers:

a. Stainless steel frame, stainless steel blades,

3. All exhaust fans shall have backdraft dampers.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 34 10 Fans (General)

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Fan manufacturers, VFD requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Panasonic, Cook, Greenheck or equal.

2. Where possible, fans must be Energy Star Rated.

3. Fans shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA Standards and shall bear AMCA labels.

Page 75: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 75

4. Wheels shall be balanced statically and dynamically, free from vibration or noises.

5. Bearings self-aligning, ball-bearing type, complete with grease fittings, extended to single point on drive side or to accessible location.

6. Actual brake horsepower of fan and drive shall not exceed nameplate rating of motor driving fan.

7. Provide direct drives on motors 15 HP or less. Sheaves shall be selected to operate at mid-point of fan curve to allow adjustment in both directions. For belt drives with more than two strands serving motors over 15 HP, provide fixed sheaves. Replace fan sheaves as necessary to obtain desired results.

8. Provide VFD's for all variable volume systems greater than 1 HP.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Roof mounted exhaust fans.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Roof Mounted Exhaust Fans:

a. Cook, Greenheck, or equal.

b. Where possible, fans must be Energy Star Rated.

c. Roof exhaust fans shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal, direct drive, weatherproof fan and aluminum casing.

d. Fans to be factory provided with bird screen, backdraft damper, and roof curb.

e. Grease fans shall be UL rated as such and provided with grease drains.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Fan manufacturers and energy ratings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide high efficiency cabinet fans, Cook or equal, for utility fans.

2. Where possible, fans must be Energy Star Rated.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 76: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 76

SECTION 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Diffuser styles and balancing methods.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Titus, Price, Kreuger, Metal-Aire, or equal.

2. Styles:

a. Ceiling Supply:

b. Ceiling Return:

c. Exhaust grilles:

d. Louvers: Ruskin ELF6350DMP or equal, coordinate finish with architect.

e. Utility/service areas:

f. Egg-crate grilles not acceptable in any location.

g. Opposed blade dampers shall not be used on any supply, return or exhaust grille, except where inline dampers will not fit and OBD will not create objectionable noise.

3. Diffuser trim to match ceiling type (if any). See reflected ceiling plans. Provide center-tees for slots.

4. Air outlet balancing shall be through volume dampers located at the upstream end of the flex duct connection to the outlet or duct/plenum tap, except Young regulators (Bowden cable dampers) may be used for outlets mounted in inaccessible ceilings and at wall. Access doors shall not be used for access to balancing dampers above inaccessible ceilings such as drywall ceilings.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: VAV diffusers and boxes.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Thermally Powered VAV Diffuser: A complete VAV terminal and thermostat self-contained in a nominal 24”x24” diffuser; thermally powered (external wiring or pneumatics will not be allowed).

a. Manufacturer: Acutherm or equal

b. The unit shall vary the supply air volume to provide both VAV heating and VAV cooling using two room sensing thermostats and one changeover thermostat.

c. The manufacturer shall warrant that the diffuser shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten years from date of shipment.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 77: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 77

SECTION 23 40 00 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Air filters.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Air Filters

a. Cambridge, AAF.

b. See equipment sections for efficiency requirements.

c. Construction Filters: Provide MERV 13 V-cell pleated filters in lieu of or in addition to final filters during construction and start-up. Remove before air balancing and replace with final filters.

d. LEED filter requirements for construction and pre-occupancy flush-out shall override these requirements when applicable.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 08 00 Commissioning

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Systems to be commissioned and required documentation.

PART 2 –Products:

1. The project plans to pursue New Construction 2009 Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning. The project also intends to pursue LEED Measurement and Verification credit. The start-up and commissioning shall comply with New Construction 2009 and Calgreen Commissioning requirements for Fundamental and Enhanced Commissioning.

2. The installing contractor of a particular system or equipment is responsible for the commissioning activities relating to that system or equipment item and shall include pricing in their bid.

3. The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioning activities and provides Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Contractor's use.

4. The following systems shall be commissioned:

a. HVAC Equipment

b. DDC Control System and devices

c. Metering devices

5. Submittals:

a. Enhanced Commissioning requires a Commissioning Design Review at 50% CD phase. Contractor to provide drawings to Commissioning Agent for review. Contractor shall provide feedback and incorporate comments into final drawings. Contractor shall also provide drawings at 100% CD for commissioning agent to conduct back-check for comment incorporation.

Page 78: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 78

b. Enhanced Commissioning requires Commissioning Agent to conduct a submittal review of all equipment included in commissioning scope. Contractor to provide submittals to Cx agent for review.

c. Submit TAB plan for Cx Agent review.

d. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Agent informed of all changes to control system documentation made during programming and setup; revise and resubmit when substantial changes are made.

e. O & M manuals: Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.

6. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform start-up and initial checkout and required functional performance testing.

7. Cooperate with the Commissioning Agent in development of the Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Agent.

8. Contractors to attend commissioning meetings necessary to facilitate the commissioning process.

9. Prepare a schedule for Mechanical system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion for use by the Commissioning Agent; update the schedule as appropriate.

10. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documents. Provide a pressure/temperature plug at each water sensor that is an input point to the control system.

11. The Prefunctional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in this section are in addition to, not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections. Submit start-up documentation, pre-functional checklists for each item of equipment to be commissioned. Submit TAB report for Commissioning Agent review prior to functional testing.

12. Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each item of equipment or other assembly to be commissioned. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the Functional Testing of the control system as required by the Commissioning Agent. Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration, graphic review and trend logging of control points monitored by the control system.

13. Commissioning agent to be provided a minimum of 2 weeks of trend data following functional testing. Data shall be in.xls,.csv file format.

14. Commissioning agent will provide a list of deficiencies after the functional testing and trending period. The contractor is responsible for making corrections and providing commissioning agent verification. The commissioning agent will only return 1 time for re-testing. Any additional testing will be back-charged to the contractor.

15. Trend Logging:

a. Trend logs must be established before functional testing. Commissioning agent to review 24 hours of trend data prior to functional testing.

b. Trend logging shall include all control points specified and required to verify system performance. This may include software points, setpoints, etc.

Page 79: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 79

c. The control system shall be capable of trending all points at 1 minute intervals and storing data for a minimum 12 month period.

16. Remote Access:

a. Remote access must be coordinated with appropriate contractors.

b. Remote access must be established prior to functional testing.

c. The commissioning agent shall be given remote access to the control system.

17. M&V Requirements

a. Collecting and storing performance data for a 12 month period is required.

b. Commissioning and review of the metering devices.

18. Provide classroom and hands-on training of Owner's designated personnel on operation and maintenance of the HVAC system, control system, and all equipment items indicated to be commissioned.

19. Provide support for any necessary off-season testing.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Software and hardware requirements, required points.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Mechanical contractor to provide, install and wire all wall switches and thermostats.

2. Alerton.

3. Coordination: Coordinate all work with other trades as required to meet the Owner's project requirements, including but not limited to:

a. During design, provide the Owner's network design consultant with port requirements (quantities, locations), IP address requirements (quantities, static/dynamic), VPN requirements, routing requirements.

b. During construction, coordinate schedule and availability requirements with the Owner's network integrator. An operational network will undoubtedly be required to test/commission building-wide controls and monitoring of mechanical systems, therefore close coordination with the network integrator is imperative to meet the construction schedule and expected results for system operation, monitoring, and control.

c. Provide whole building / plant level load and utility monitoring, including hot water and chilled water demand (Btu/h), main gas meter and submeter demand (therms), and main electical loads. Coordinate with other trades as required to plan for adequate connectivity, connect and trend data from the points.

d. Coordinate connection to E-Mon D-Mon power submetering system installed by Division 26 in order to collect and trend data for use by Owner.

Page 80: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 80

e. Provide floor-by-floor load monitoring, including hot water and chilled water demand (Btu/h). Coordinate with other trades as required to plan for adequate connectivity, connect and trend data from the points.

f. Coordinate with Division 22 to provide status alarms for booster water system pumps and sump pumps.

4. The system shall be DDC-electric type without the use of pneumatic controls or actuators.

5. General Hardware Requirements

a. All buildings shall be capable of stand-alone operation so that buildings may be sold off and operated independently. For this bid, a single front-end PC shall monitor all buildings, but the system shall be capable of allowing each building to have its own front-end PC.

b. The DDC system shall be composed of intelligent control panels connected via a peer-to-peer communications network that allows point information from any panel (including zone controllers) to be used in a control sequence in any other panel. The use of the operator workstation or gateway to serve as a communications server is not acceptable.

c. In general, a single stand-alone controller shall be provided for each system (e.g. each air handler and associated condensing unit) and each zone so that control can be maintained in case of communications failure.

d. Each stand-alone unit shall contain the required software stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery to be retained. Controllers shall allow independent operation regardless of the status of the other units or operator workstation.

e. Operator Workstation(s): Provide IBM-compatible PCs with a minimum of 2.66 GHz processor; 2 GB RAM; 1 TB hard disk providing data at 100 MB/sec; DVD-RW drive; serial, parallel, and network communication ports; 22-inch color 1920x1080 resolution (or higher) LCD monitor; keyboard; mouse; and color laser printer configured to print control screens and reports with one full set of replacement tower cartridges (all colors). Locate in the facility security office and hard-wire connected to the network.

6. Remote Access to Operator Interface:

a. Provide remote access to the operator's terminal via web-based, browser interface.

b. If proprietary software installation is required for remote access, provide three (3) licenses and complete copies of the software to the Owner for the Owner's use in perpetuity.

c. Remote access shall permit viewing of all control screens and provide access to all trend data and trend configuration features.

d. Provide an independent DSL connection (or equivalent) for remote access and pay for connectivity through the end of the warranty period. If the Owner is able to provide similar connectivity in lieu of an independent connection, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that this connectivity is established and remote access is fully functional at system acceptance.

e. Memory for data trending shall reside in DDC panels; the front-end PC shall not be used for nor need to be connected for data trending to occur.

Page 81: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 81

Memory shall be large enough to record 2048 records of each hardware point on the panel and an equal number of software points, each record to include both data value and time of occurrence. See below for trending software requirements.

7. Temperature sensors:

a. Except as indicated below, room sensors shall be accurate to within 0.5°F at 77°F.

b. Duct and immersion sensors shall be accurate to within 0.5°F at 77°F. All piping immersion sensors shall be in thermopiles that allow removal from operating system.

c. Outdoor air sensors shall be accurate to within 0.36°F at 77°F and shall have solar shield.

d. Sensors shall drift no more than 0.3°F and shall not require calibration over a three-year period.

e. Setpoints shall be adjustable at all wall mounted sensors with setpoint knobs with software limits.

f. Other than sensors in 24 hour spaces, provide off-hour override button on room sensors for off-hour override of HVAC with software limitations as to duration of operation.

g. Knowledge of modulating device positions is required, i.e.. if a floating point actuator is used, feedback from the actuator is required as an analog input to determine damper position.

8. General Software Requirements

a. Front-end software shall:

(a) Include graphical displays of all systems and subsystems. Provide graphics also of all floor plans showing HVAC zones. Setpoints shall be adjustable by clicking on the point on the display. Data shall refresh automatically on a regular basis or by a keyboard command.

(b) Allow the user to create custom graphics.

(c) Allow the user to modify and input control sequence software and to download (and compile if required) to panels. Software must include programming tools such as search and replace by variable name, test sequences, etc.

(d) Set up, graphically view, and export trend data to printer or disk. Data must be ASCII or otherwise compatible with Excel spreadsheet.

b. Include software and license for one off-site PC to allow it to fully communicate with the system.

c. Programming language must allow virtually any control sequences to be written. Software shall be capable of the sequences proposed in this specification without exception. Object based, graphical, Basic-like, or Pascal-like languages are preferred. "Canned" software is not preferred and if used, the controls contractor shall guarantee that software meets the desired control sequence requirements or "canned" software shall be replaced at contractor's cost for programmable software.

d. All custom programs shall be modifiable from front-end PCs without having to "bum chips."

Page 82: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 82

e. The system must be capable of supporting software ("virtual") points to be used in control sequences and monitored just as if they were real digital or analog points.

f. All setpoints shall be user adjustable (via virtual points if necessary) and not embedded in programming using constants. This includes PID gains.

g. All real and virtual. points shall be accessible to all control panels via the communications network for use in any control sequences and for text and graphical display on the front-end computer. (Exception: internal timers and switches that the operator would have no need or desire to change.)

h. Every point, both real and virtual, shall be available for data trending. Trending software shall be capable of recording point values and time on both a user specified regular time step and on a change-of-state basis (data is recorded when point changes by a specified amount (analog) or changes state (binary)).

i. Trend Configuration: Operator shall be able to configure trend sample or change of value (COV) interval, start time, and stop time for each system data object and shall be able to retrieve data for use in spreadsheets and standard database programs. Controller shall sample and store trend data and shall be able to archive one year of 1 minute interval trend data for every point to the hard disk. Configure trends as specified in control drawings and sequences. Trends shall be BACnet trend objects.

j. All binary output points controlling fans, pumps, chillers, etc. shall include automatic run-time accumulation with program controlled zeroing.

k. Alarm software to allow a minimum of 3 levels of alarms to be assigned to different events at user's option. All analog input points shall have user adjustable high and low alarm limits. Binary output points to devices with status inputs shall automatically generate an alarm when the two points disagree after a user adjustable time delay from a change-of-state. The system shall be capable of assigning actions to each alarm level, including printing, displaying on front-end PC with continuous or momentary audible beep, or automatically dialing out alarms to at least two phone numbers, e.g. a remote PC and pager.

l. Temperature and temperature setpoints shall display and be capable of being set to an accuracy to 0.5°F. Static pressures and setpoints shall display and be capable of set to an accuracy of 0.05"w.c.. Differential pressures and setpoints shall display and be capable of set to an accuracy of 0.5 psi.

m. The software must allow the user to manually override any real or virtual point at the front-end computer to fix the output value and override any control sequences. Point and graphical display screens must clearly show that the point is under operator control.

n. Control sequences shall be translated into appropriate programming language by the controls subcontractor then submitted to the Engineer for review at least three weeks before installation and download at the site. During the warranty period, software bugs (both due to programming misinterpretations and sequence errors) shall be corrected and any reasonable control sequence changes shall be provided at no additional cost.

Page 83: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 83

9. Points. Provide at a minimum the following points, in addition to any points required to meet specified control sequences.

a. VAV AC units (provided via gateway or interface module to AC units):

(a) Start/stop

(b) General trouble alarm

(c) Fan failure

(d) Dirty filter

(e) Supply air static pressure setpoint reset

(f) Building static pressure setpoint reset

(g) Supply air temperature setpoint reset

(h) Supply air temperature

(i) Return air temperature

(j) Supply duct static. (If redundant sensor is used, tap into the same static pressure signal used by the AC unit for control.)

b. Single zone AC units (provided via gateway or interface module to AC units):

(a) Start/stop

(b) General trouble alarm

(c) Fan failure

(d) Dirty filter

(e) Space temperature setpoint adjust

(f) Space temperature

c. Zones

(a) Space temperature

(b) Total supply volume leaving VAV unit

(c) Cooling damper output with position feedback (either timed on/off or via actuator feedback)

(d) Heating damper/valve position

(e) Thermostat setpoint adjust (adjustable by user with adjustable software limits)

d. Exhaust fans and pumps

(a) On/off

(b) Fan status (using current relay)

e. General

(a) Outdoor air temperature at the roof. (Do not locate in an outdoor air intake. This causes the sensor to receive a bad signal when stack effect causes exfiltration when the AC unit is off at night in cold weather. Locate in shaded area with radiation shield.)

10. Control Sequences: The following features are required of the control sequences for the equipment specified. Provide all sensors, programming, and control devices to accomplish this logic.

Page 84: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 84

a. Provide fully-integrated water-side economizer (free cooling) logic to allow economizer-only operation (free-cooling heat exchange only) and partial economizer operation (free-cooling heat exchange in series with chiller cooling) of the chilled water plant.

b. Provide hot water supply temperature reset logic based on ambient outside air dry bulb temperature, with the warmest water delivered during the coldest weather.

11. Electrical Work:

a. Provide system graphics for each controlled device and/or integrated systems as required by the Owner. Origin of information shall be transparent to the operator and shall be controlled, displayed, trended, etc. as if the points were hardwired to the BAS.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 09 13 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: Devices and programming.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Thermostats:

a. Acceptable manufacturers:

(a) Honeywell, Robert Shaw, Emerson, Ritetemp, White-Rodgers, Hunter, Lux (or pre-approved equal)

b. Screen:

(a) Minimum 4 in² backlit LCD display

(b) Minimum information displayed

(c) Zone temperature

(d) Setpoint temperature

(e) Low battery indicator

(f) Cooling or Heating operation

(g) Current time

(h) Low battery indicator

c. Programs:

(a) 5 + 1 + 1 per week or 7 days per week

d. Features:

(a) Thermostat shall have equal or greater number of stages for cooling and heating when unit(s) being served have multiple stages of cooling and/or heating. Low voltage

(b) Battery backup

(c) Heat-Off-Cool-Auto operation options

(d) Energy Star compliant

Page 85: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 85

(e) California T-24 Part 6 2008 Compliant

e. Temperature Accuracy;

(a) +/- 2ºF

2. Water Flow Meters:

a. Acceptable manufacturers:

(a) ABB, Siemens, EMCO (or pre-approved equal)

b. Water Flow Sensor: Full bore electromagnetic flow meter with suitable range for expected input, and no moving parts.

(a) Accuracy: 0.5 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

(b) Connection: Flanged

(c) Construction: Fully welded, suitable for direct burial

c. Flow signal converter:

(a) Manufacturer: Same as Water Flow Sensor Manufacturer

(b) Display: Alphanumeric display indicating current flow rate. Mount in an easily visible location between 48” and 60” from floor; remote mount shall be provided if required.

(c) Accuracy: 0.5 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

(d) Output: As required to interface with control system.

3. CO2 sensors:

a. Acceptable manufacturers:

(a) Honeywell, GE, Johnson, Veris Industries, AirTest Industries, Digital Control Systems, (or pre-approved equal)

b. Sensor: Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR)

c. Display: LCD display of current CO2 level in ppm.

d. Scale: 0-2000 ppm

e. Accuracy: +/- 2% of full scale and +/- 75 ppm @1000ppm

f. Calibration frequency: 5 years or greater

g. Mounting height per LEED requirements

4. Control Sequence:

a. Provide control sequence as needed to provide a fully functioning system including a control sequence that not only meets the indoor design criteria but also current energy codes and this project’s low energy use goals.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

PART 1 –General:

1. Section Includes: TAB requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 86: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 86

1. Provide full TAB services for the HVAC systems. Include Title 24 acceptance test requirements in pricing.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

DIVISIONS 24 & 25 – NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 00 General Requirements for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated electrical systems.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Material and Equipment: Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period includes use of equipment and materials of similar size under similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cable

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all cable for circuits nominally rated greater than 600 volts and less than 15,000 volts, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: Conductors shall be copper, stranded and of the sizes indicated. All conductors 600 volts and above shall be in raceway unless otherwise noted. All cable used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2. Conductors are to be Okoguard-Okoseal Type MV-105 105-degree rating with 133% insulation level. Conductors are to be uncoated, Okopact (compact stranded) copper. Strand screen is to be extruded semiconducting EPR. Insulation is to be Okoguard EPR. Insulation screen is to be Extruded semiconducting EPR. Shield is to be copper tape. Jacket is to be Okoseal. Cable to be suitable for insulation in wet or dry locations, indoors or outdoors, in raceway or underground duct.

3. Color Coding: As specified in Part 3.

Page 87: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 87

4. Manufacturer: Okonite Company or approved equal.

5. Terminations: Splices and terminations shall to be furnished and installed by STT Splicing or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 19 Low Voltage Wire and Cables

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: Conductors shall be copper, Class B stranded and of the sizes indicated. All conductors 120 volts and above shall be in raceway unless otherwise noted. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. All cable used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2. Unless otherwise noted, conductors #6 and larger shall be XHHW insulation suitable for operation in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 75C in wet locations and 90C in dry locations. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be THHN in dry locations and THWN/THHN in wet locations. Control Cable shall be THHN.

3. Insulation Marking: All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

4. Color Coding: As specified in paragraph 3.03.

5. Special Wiring: Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the special wiring requirements to the Engineer and, if approved, provide same. Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.

6. Other Wiring: Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the Engineer.

7. Terminations:

a. Cable Termination for Copper: Crimp style two hole NEMA spade terminals designed and rated for copper cable.

b. Wire Terminations: Crimp on ring-tongue terminals, insulated sleeve, of proper size for the wire used.

c. End Seals: Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

d. Manufacturer: T&B, Burndy or approved equal.

8. Manufacturer: BICC General Cable Inc., Southwire, or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 88: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 88

SECTION 26 05 26 Electrical System Grounding

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing, installing, connection and testing of all grounding systems as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. The grounding system shall consist of the grounding conductors, ground bus, ground fittings and clamps, and bonding conductors as shown on the Drawings.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 30 Rooftop Conduit Support for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber conduit and box supports for electrical conduit systems on roofs.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a support capacity of 2500 pounds per linear foot of support.

a. Provide appropriate documentation associated with the recycled product to assist with LEEDtm Certification.

2. Each base to have a reflective yellow stripe.

3. Dimensions are to be six inches wide by height and width as required.

4. Steel frame is to be 14 gauge galvanized for D and CE series and 12 gauge strut galvanized for CB and CS series.

5. Attaching hardware is to be zinc plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.

6. Manufacturer: B-Line C-Port series or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 32 Junction and Pull Boxes for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 89: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 89

1. For boxes in dry interior locations use NEMA 1 box. For boxes in wet or exterior locations use NEMA 4 box. NEMA 3R is acceptable for exterior locations if installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Standard Outlet Boxes, per UL 514A: Galvanized, one-piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

3. Switch boxes, per UL 514A: Two inch wide by three inches long galvanized steel switch boxes shall be used only for the installation of single switches. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable for the application indicated.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

4. Cast metal Outlet Boxes per UL 514A: Four inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required. Boxes shall be furnished with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and with neoprene cover gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds VXF series, Appleton JBX series or approved equal.

5. Conduit bodies per UL 514A: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of controls or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets, or approved equal.

6. Sheet Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 box sized to Code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers.

a. Manufacturer: Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or approved equal.

7. Cast Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron junction boxes with bolt-on, interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Appleton RS series, Crouse-Hinds RS series, or approved equal.

8. Flush Mounted Pull boxes and Junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 33 Raceways and Fittings for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and fittings for above grade installations, underground duct

Page 90: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 90

installations and inside buildings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Uni-couple EMT is acceptable.

3. Flexible conduit: Flexible metal conduit (Greenfield) shall be galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked from a continuous metal strip and shall conform to UL 1 and FS A-A-55810.

4. Liquidtight flexible conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be liquid-tight (Sealtight) of galvanized steel interlocked from a continuous metal strip with an extruded polyvinyl chloride cover and shall conform to UL 360 and FS A-A-55810.

5. Rigid non-metallic conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit for concrete encasement shall be Type EB, all others shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40 or NEMA TC2 Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90C wires, and shall conform to UL 651.

a. Conduit for use for utility feeders shall comply with utility requirements.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 34 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all raceway and appropriate fittings and boxes to install a nonmetallic surface raceway system for the power and communications system as indicated on the electrical drawings and described in this section. Refer to architectural drawings for mounting heights and details. Installer shall comply fully with the manufacturer's instructions, and with electrical and safety codes.

PART 2 –Products:

1. The surface nonmetallic raceway system specified herein for branch circuit wiring and/or data, voice, video and other low-voltage wiring shall be the Wiremold 5500 System or approved equal by Hubbell or Panduit.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 35 Surface Metal Raceway for Electrical System

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all Raceway and appropriate fittings and boxes to install a Steel Surface Raceway System as indicated on the electrical drawings

Page 91: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 91

and described in this section. Installer shall comply fully with the manufacturer's instructions, and with electrical and safety codes.

PART 2 –Products:

1. The galvanized steel surface raceway systems specified herein for branch circuit wiring shall be Wiremold V700 Series manufactured or approved equal by Hubbell or Panduit.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 43

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing raceways, raceway spacers, reinforcing steel, anchors and encasing material with necessary excavation for underground ducts.

2. Encasement - Encasement shall be sand or concrete, at the Contractor's option, for all other raceways.

3. Where required - All raceways for medium voltage cable and all other raceways, where run underground and in excavation shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of this Section. Conduits run underground without encasement shall be as indicated in the Drawings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. As specified in Section 26 05 33 Electrical System Raceways and Fittings.

2. Spacers:

a. Molded plastic as furnished by the raceway manufacturer, to cradle and position the raceways in the excavation for placing the encasement.

b. Shape to accurately fit the raceway, provide the correct raceway spacing, to interlock in place and stack.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 44 In Grade Pull Boxes for Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of all work necessary to furnish and install pre-cast concrete pull boxes with necessary excavation.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General Requirements:

a. Concrete pull boxes for electrical power, controls and other communication circuits shall consist of pre-cast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions' bases, and covers as specified herein. Pre-cast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes. Acceptable manufacturers are Christy, Utility Vault, Brooks, or approved equal.

2. Construction:

Page 92: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 92

a. Pre-cast concrete pull boxes for electrical power distribution and communication circuits with associated risers shall conform to ACI 318. Pull box tops in non-traffic areas shall conform to ACI 318. Pull boxes shall be the type noted on the Drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as shown. Walls shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls shall be of monolithic concrete construction.

3. Covers:

a. The word "ELECTRICAL" shall be cast in the top face of all electrical power cable boxes.

4. Concrete:

a. Aggregates used in the concrete mix, either coarse or fine, excluding light weight aggregates, shall conform to ASTM C33. Aggregates shall be properly graded and free of deleterious substances to produce a homogeneous concrete mix when blended with cement.

5. Cement:

a. The cement shall be Type II low alkali Portland cement and shall meet the requirement of ASTM C150.

6. Compressive Strength:

a. Sufficient cement content shall be used per batch to produce a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.

7. Reinforcing Steel:

a. Welded wire mesh for street lighting boxes shall conform to ASTM A 185.

b. Reinforcing bars for primary and secondary electrical pullboxes, and communication pull boxes shall be intermediate grade billet steel conforming to ASTM A615.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 73.10 Electrical Power Systems Studies

PART 1 –General:

1. An independent registered by the State of California Electrical Engineer shall provide electrical power system studies for the project job. The type and content of each study is specified in the following articles.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Short-Circuit Analysis:

a. Calculation of the maximum RMS symmetrical three-phase short-circuit current at each significant location in the electrical system shall be made using a digital computer.

b. Appropriate motor short-circuit contribution shall be included at the appropriate locations in the system so that the computer calculated values represent the highest short-circuit current the equipment will be subjected to under fault conditions.

c. A tabular computer printout shall be included which lists the calculated short-circuit currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or

Page 93: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 93

withstand current ratings, and notes regarding the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment.

d. The study shall include a computer printout of input circuit data including conductor lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit information as related to the short-circuit calculations.

e. Include a computer printout identifying the maximum available short-circuit current in RMS symmetrical amperes and the X/R ratio of the fault current for each bus/branch calculation.

f. The system one-line diagram shall be computer generated and will clearly identify individual equipment buses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and bus connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at each bus location and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.

g. A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for improvements to the system.

2. Protective Device Time-Current Coordination Analysis:

a. The time-current coordination analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer software intended for this purpose, and will include the determination of settings, ratings, or types for the overcurrent protective devices supplied.

b. Where necessary, an appropriate compromise shall be made between system protection and service continuity with system protection and service continuity considered to be of equal importance.

c. A sufficient number of computer generated log-log plots shall be provided to indicate the degree of system protection and coordination by displaying the time-current characteristics of series connected overcurrent devices and other pertinent system parameters.

d. Computer printouts shall accompany the log-log plots and will contain descriptions for each of the devices shown, settings of the adjustable devices, the short-circuit current availability at the device location when known, and device identification numbers to aid in locating the devices on the log-log plots and the system one-line diagram.

e. The study shall include a separate, tabular computer printout containing the suggested device settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the equipment where the device is located, and the device number corresponding to the device on the system one-line diagram.

f. A computer generated system one-line diagram shall be provided which clearly identifies individual equipment buses, bus numbers, device identification numbers and the maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known.

g. A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and service continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as required for addressing system protection or device coordination deficiencies.

Page 94: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 94

h. Significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination shall be called to the attention of the engineer and recommendations made for improvements as soon as they are identified.

3. Arch-Flash Hazard Analysis:

a. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed with the aid of computer software intended for this purpose in order to calculate Arc-Flash Incident Energy (AFIE) levels and flash protection boundary distances.

b. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in conjunction with a short-circuit analysis and a time-current coordination analysis.

c. Results of the Analysis shall be submitted in tabular form, and shall include device or bus name, bolted fault and arcing fault current levels, flash protection boundary distances, personal-protective equipment classes and AFIE levels.

d. The analysis shall be performed under worst-case Arc-Flash conditions, and the final report shall describe, when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst-case bolted fault conditions.

e. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed by a registered professional engineer.

f. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall be performed in compliance with IEEE Standard 1584-2002, the IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Calculations.

g. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include recommendations for reducing AFIE levels and enhancing worker safety.

h. The proposed vendor shall demonstrate experience with Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual Arc-Flash Hazard Analyses it has performed in the past year.

i. The proposed vendor shall demonstrate capabilities in providing equipment, services, and training to reduce Arc-Flash exposure and train workers in accordance with NFPA 70E and other applicable standards.

j. The proposed vendor shall demonstrate experience in providing equipment labels in compliance with NEC-2002 section 110 and ANSI Z535.4 to identify AFIE and appropriate Personal Protective Equipment classes.

4. Load Flow and Voltage Drop Analysis:

a. The Load Flow and Voltage Drop Analysis shall be made using a digital computer and include calculations of power flow in all three-phase branch and feeder circuits, calculated voltages at each bus and voltage drops of each feeder.

b. The analysis shall provide the calculated maximum values of kVA, kW, kVAr, power factor, and amperes for each power circuit.

c. The calculated power losses in each branch and total system losses shall be provided.

d. A computer printout listing all cables, transformers, loads, and other circuit data shall be included.

e. Provide tabular bus-to-bus computer printouts listing the calculated values.

Page 95: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 95

f. The analysis shall include a computer generated system one-line diagram clearly identifying individual equipment buses, bus numbers, cable and bus connections, power flow throughout the system, and other information related to the analysis.

g. A discussion section evaluating the loading and voltage levels for the system shall be provided and recommendations included as appropriate to improve system operation.

h. Significant deficiencies in loading or voltage levels shall be called to attention of the engineer (architect) and recommendations made for improvements at soon as they are identified.

5. Manufacturers:

a. The specified electrical power system studies shall be performed by APPLIED POWER (650) 596-3417 or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. Work included in this Section:

a. Infrared testing.

b. Equipment operational tests.

c. Cable insulation test.

d. Ground fault interrupter testing.

e. Lighting controls installation.

2. General Scope:

a. It is the intent of these tests to assure that all electrical equipment, both Contractor and Owner-supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications.

b. The tests and inspections shall determine the suitability for energization.

c. Schedule tests and give a minimum of two weeks advance notice to the Owner and Engineer.

3. C.Provide independent test lab to field calibrate and set trip units on all circuit breakers above 225 amps.

PART 2 –Products: Not Used

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 09 23 Lighting Occupancy Sensors

PART 1 –General:

1. Work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to

Page 96: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 96

the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational lighting occupancy sensor system, as described herein.

2. Examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 26.

3. Coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems.

4. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area.

5. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Ultrasonic occupancy sensors shall be capable of detecting presence in the floor area to be controlled by detecting doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound using patent pending “SuperFuser” ultrasonic diffusion technology for wider area signal dispersion and increased sensitivity.

2. The UT 300 and UT-305 sensors shall have a manual on feature that is facilitated by installing a momentary switch into the low voltage sensor wiring.

3. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 kHz. They shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled areas.

4. Sensors of varying frequencies shall not be allowed so as to prevent sensors from interfering with each other and to assure compatibility in the event more sensors are added.

5. Sensors shall utilize SmartSet technology to optimize time delay and sensitivity setting. A DIP switch shall provide selectability to SmartSet or user adjustability.

6. Detection shall be maintained when a person of average size and weight moves only within or a maximum distance of twelve inches either in a horizontal or vertical manner at the approximate speed of 12 inches per second. The sum of this distance, volume and speed represent the average condition ultrasonic sensors must meet in order for the lights to not go off when a person is reading or writing while seated at a desk.

7. A DIP switch or other override-ON function for use in the event of failure must be available at the sensor. The LED is to remain ON so as to be visible from the floor as a constant reminder that the automatic function has been by-passed.

8. Sensors shall operate with Watt Stopper power packs and lighting control products. The UT-355 shall be self-contained with integral switching and power supply for operation at 120/230/277/347 VAC, 50/60 Hz, rated at 800 watts 120 VAC, 1200 watts 277 VAC.

Page 97: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 97

9. Sensors shall be ceiling mounted and shall not protrude more than 0.36 inches to blend in aesthetically with the ceiling. The sensors shall offer two mounting options.

10. The sensors shall have an additional single-pole, double-throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed, and common outputs rated at 1 Amp for 24 VDC. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data logging, and other control options.

11. Sensors shall have terminal style wiring for faster installation time.

12. Sensors shall have a walk-through mode, where lights turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds.

13. Sensitivity and timer controls shall be accessible from the front of the sensor and shall be concealed by a hinged cover.

14. Sensors shall cover 360° and up to 500 square feet for UT-300-1, 1000 square feet for UT300-2, and 2000 square feet for UT-300-3 of walking motion. Hallway and corridor sensors shall be model WT-2250 and shall cover up to 90 linear feet.

15. Manufacturer: The Watt Stopper UT-300-1, UT-300-2, UT-300-3, WT-2250

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 09 25 Daylighting Control System

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of providing but is not limited to the following: photocell controlled lighting control system. All devices shall be fully compatible.

2. See the following specification sections for work related to the work of this section:

a. 26 05 00 General Requirements for Electrical Systems

b. 26 50 00 Lighting

PART 2 –Products:

1. Daylight Dimming Control Module:

a. Dimming control of interior lights in response to light level data, utilizing an external photocell to continuously measure incoming daylight levels. Photocell shall proportionally adjust the Daylight Dimming Control Module’s dimming response. The Multizone Daylight Dimming Controls system shall be an open loop system up to three separate zones.

b. Compatible with any standard 0 to 10 VDC dimming ballast, up to 50 ballasts per zone.

c. Capable of dimming lighting for up to three control zones utilizing a single photocell with a range from 3 footcandles to 6,000 footcandles.

d. Coordinate primary input voltage with available voltage.

e. Each control zone shall have its own separate, adjustable dimming response, fade rate and ramp rate, min /max output, setpoint and cutoff time.

Page 98: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 98

f. Normally open contacts shall be minimum of 620 watts, and shall open after all control zones have been dimmed to the minimum output for 12 minutes to signal a power pack to disconnect the line voltage power to the ballasts.

g. For simplified set up, internal calculations for dimming response for individual channels shall be automatic performed by control module.

h. Suitable for mounting on a DIN rail. All necessary adjustments and calibrations shall be made to the control module only; none shall be necessary at the photocell location.

i. Control interlock “off” signals from an occupancy sensor, time switch or energy management system shall immediately dim lighting in all zones to minimum output.

j. For ease of set up, programming shall be menu driven, pushbutton initiated.

k. Enclosure:

i. Provide 12” x 12” sized, NEMA 1 rated enclosure with dual pre-mounted DIN rails suitable for holding Daylight Dimming Control Modules, DC Power Supply and relay packs.

ii. Manufacturer: The Watt Stopper LSE-12 or approved equal.

l. Manufacturer: The Watt Stopper LCD-203 series or approved equal.

2. Photocell for Multizone Daylight Dimming Controls:

a. Utilize a photodiode element to continuously measure the ambient light level.

b. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.

c. Range shall be from 3 – 6,000 footcandles. Photocell shall operate on 24 VDC.

d. 3 conductor, 18 AWG twisted cable wiring rated for 300 volts. Maximum 250 feet wire length from Daylight Dimming Control Module to Photocell.

e. Manufacturer: The Watt Stopper LS-290C or approved equal.

3. Dimming Wall Switch:

a. Four modes of operation: Manual OFF, Manual ON, Manual Dim, and AUTOMATIC/MANUAL toggle, with automatic mode LED indicator. Dimming Wall Switch shall hold lighting at the user-designated level until the control module is returned to automatic control.

b. Restoration of automatic operation may occur by cycling the control interlock signal from other control devices, such as a time clock or occupancy sensor.

c. Wiring shall be five conductor for use with LCO, seven conductor when used with LCD, 18 AWG twisted cable rated for 300 volts; maximum 150 foot wire length from Daylight Dimming Control Module.

d. Up to four LS-4C may be wired to a single controller, at 24 VDC operation, a Class 2 device.

e. Manufacturer: The Watt Stopper LS-4C or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 99: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 99

SECTION 26 22 13 Transformers

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of providing dry-type energy efficient transformers per NEMA TP1 as described in this section.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General purpose transformers for supplying lighting and small power loads shall be dry type, 60 Hertz, temperature rise not exceeding 150*C under full load in an ambient of 40*C. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50oC rise above a 40oC ambient. Insulating materials are to exceed NEMA ST20 standards and be rated for 220*C UL component recognized insulation system. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Transformer shall comply with all applicable provisions of NEMA Standard ST20 and shall have NEMA Standard taps.

2. All cores to be constructed with low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point to prevent core overheating.

3. The transformer enclosures shall be ventilated and be fabricated of heavy gauge, sheet steel construction.

4. Factory Finish:

a. All non-painted steel parts shall be zinc plated.

b. All painted steel parts shall be cleaned and a zinc- phosphate (outdoor equipment) or iron phosphate (indoor equipment) pre-treatment applied prior to paint application.

c. Paint Color shall be ANSI-61 (light gray) TGIC polyester powder, applied electrostatically through air. Following paint application, parts shall be baked to produce a hard durable finish. The average thickness of the paint film shall be 2.0 mils. Paint film shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, sags, flaking and peeling.

d. Adequacy of paint finish to inhibit the buildup of rust on ferrous metal materials shall be tested and evaluated per paragraphs 5.2.8.1-7 of ANSI C37.20.3-1987. Salt spray withstand tests in accordance with paragraph 5.2.8.4 shall be performed on a periodic basis to provide conformance to this corrosion resistance standard of at least 2500 hours minimum (outdoor equipment) or 600 hours minimum (indoor equipment).

5. Required taps:

a. Transformers shall have a minimum of (4) 2.5% full capacity primary taps.

6. Transformer shall be indoor/outdoor type. Provide unit UL listed for indoor/outdoor mounting.

7. Efficiency: Transformers shall be low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP1 when operated at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accord with NEMA TP2.

Page 100: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 100

Single Phase Three Phase

KVA Efficiency KVA Efficiency

15 97.7% 15 97%

25 98% 30 97.5%

37.5 98.2% 45 97.7%

50 98.3% 75 98%

75 98.5% 112.5 98.2%

100 98.6% 150 98.3%

167 98.7% 225 98.5%

250 98.8% 300 98.6%

333 98.9% 500 98.7%

750 98.8%

8. Maximum sound levels shall be warranted as follows.

a. 15 – 50 KVA: 45dB

b. 51 – 150 KVA: 50 dB

c. 151 – 300 KVA: 55dB

d. 301 – 500 KVA: 60dB

e. 501 – 700 KVA 62dB

f. 701 – 1000 KVA 64dB

g. 1001 – 1500 KVA 65dB

h. 1501 – 2000 KVA 66dB

9. Nameplates:

a. Each transformer shall have a field mounted identifying nameplate giving the transformer identification as shown on the Drawings. See specification section 26 05 00.

10. Acceptable manufacturer: Square D Type EE or approved equal by General Electric Company, or Acme.

SECTION 26 24 13 Switchboards

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing switchboards, as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 101: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 101

1. General: Switchboards shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with applicable portions of the latest editions of NEMA PB-2 and Underwriter Laboratories UL-891 and the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code. All sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled.

2. Ratings: The switchboard and devices shall have voltage, current and short circuit rating as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Construction:

a. Switchboards shall be completely self-supporting structure of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one metal enclosed switchboard 90 inches high. Sides, top, and rear covers shall be code gauge steel, bolted to the switchboard structure.

b. The switchboard shall be furnished and installed complete with all underground pull sections, utility sections, main device and feeder sections as indicated on the Drawings. Underground pull sections, utility cable termination, transformer and metering sections shall be in accordance with Pacific Gas and Electric Company requirements.

c. All vertical sections comprising the switchboard shall be aligned front and rear.

d. See Riser Diagram for Switchboard minimum short circuit current rating.

4. Factory Finish:

a. All non-painted steel parts shall be zinc plated.

b. All painted steel parts shall be cleaned and a zinc- phosphate (outdoor equipment) or iron phosphate (indoor equipment) pre-treatment applied prior to paint application

c. Paint Color shall be ANSI 61 (light gray) TGIC polyester powder, applied electrostatically through air unless otherwise noted. Following paint application, parts shall be baked to produce a hard durable finish. The average thickness of the paint film shall be 2.0 mils. Paint film shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, sags, flaking and peeling.

d. Adequacy of paint finish to inhibit the buildup of rust on ferrous metal materials shall be tested and evaluated per paragraphs 5.2.8.1-7 of ANSI C37.20.3-1987. Salt spray withstand tests in accordance with paragraph 5.2.8.4 shall be performed on a periodic basis to provide conformance to this corrosion resistance standard of at least 2500 hours minimum (outdoor equipment) or 600 hours minimum (indoor equipment).

5. Bushbars:

a. All buses shall be silver plated copper, supported with high impact, non-tracking insulating material, braced to withstand the mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions. The current density of the bus shall not exceed 1000 amperes per square inch of cross-section area or shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL standard 891 temperature rise requirements.

b. A ground bus shall be furnished secured to each vertical section structure, and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard.

c. The neutral bus in the feeder sections shall be not further than 20 inches from the front of the switchboard.

Page 102: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 102

d. Vertical main bus bars shall be furnished full height to accommodate future branch devices.

e. Full provisions for the addition of future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions.

6. Devices:

a. The main device, where indicated to be individually mounted, shall be completely isolated from the utility and the feeder sections of the switchboard, both in the device section and the cable section of the switchboard cubicle. The cable section shall also be isolated from the main horizontal bus. The main device cubicle shall have UL service equipment label.

b. Feeder devices shall be group-mounted and be front accessible, furnished with vertical wiring gutter on the front of the distribution sections. Wiring gutters shall be furnished with hinged, code gauge steel formed covers. Unused device space shall be covered with blank code gauge steel covers.

7. Circuit Breakers:

a. See specification section 26 28 16. Circuit breakers, unless otherwise indicated, shall be the molded case type with ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

8. Main Circuit Breaker:

a. Circuit breaker shall be 80 percent rated, electronic trip type molded case breaker with an over center toggle-type mechanism, providing quick-make, quick-break action.

b. Electronic circuit breakers shall have the following time/current response adjustments: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short Time Pickup, Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup, Ground Fault Delay and Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings (fully adjustable) and shall be independent of all other adjustments.

c. Electronic Trip Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true rms sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth (13th) harmonic. Breaker shall be rated as shown on Drawings.

d. Electronic Trip Long Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or exceeds the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be provided.

9. Instrument Transformers:

a. Current transformers shall be window type conforming to ANSI C57.13, one per phase.

b. Potential transformers shall conform to ANSI C57.13.

10. Nameplates:

a. Each switchboard shall have a field mounted identifying nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings. See specification section 26 05 00.

11. Switchboard shall be designed for seismic level four conditions.

Page 103: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 103

12. Outdoor Installation: Switchboards for outdoor installation shall be furnished in NEMA 3R non-walk-in enclosures provided with thermostatically controlled space heaters in each vertical section. Space heaters shall be powered from a circuit breaker protected circuit originating within the switchboard and shall be sized adequately to prevent the formation of condensation. Space heater shall be suitable for operation at 120V A.

a. Provide transformer as required.

13. Manufacturer:

a. The switchboard shall be Square D QED2, or approved equal by Siemens, General Electric, Cutler Hammer, or IEM.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 24 16 Panelboard and Distribution Panels

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing panelboards and circuit breakers as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: Lighting and Receptacle Panelboards shall be the automatic circuit breaker type. The number and arrangement of circuits, trip ratings, spares and blank spaces for future circuit breakers shall be as shown on the Drawings or 42 circuits. All circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic bolt-on type, with 1, 2 or 3 poles a shown, each with a single operating handle. Tandem or piggy-back breakers shall not be used.

2. Nameplates:

a. Each panelboard shall have a field mounted identifying nameplate giving the panel identification as shown on the Drawings. See specification section 26 05 00.

b. Each panelboard shall have a manufacturer's nameplate showing the voltage, bus rating, number of phases, frequency and number of wires.

3. Construction:

a. Panelboards shall be factory assembled.

b. Main circuit breakers shall be independently mounted from the branch circuit breakers. Back fed main breaker configurations are not acceptable.

c. Panelboards and enclosures shall conform to NEMA PB1 and 250, UL 50 and 67, and requirements of all relevant codes. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment in conformance with UL 869.

d. Panelboards shall be furnished with hinged trim construction where the front cover is hinged to the box. Panelboards shall have a front door with key latch and a typed directory card and holder. Panelboard circuits shall be arranged with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Provide weatherproof, NEMA type 3R enclosures for outdoor installation.

4. Factory Finish:

a. All non-painted steel parts shall be zinc plated.

Page 104: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 104

b. All painted steel parts shall be cleaned and a zinc phosphate (outdoor equipment) or iron phosphate (indoor equipment) pre-treatment applied prior to paint application.

c. Paint Color shall be ANSI 61 (light gray) TGIC polyester powder, applied electrostatically through air unless otherwise noted. Following paint application, parts shall be baked to produce a hard durable finish. The average thickness of the paint film shall be 2.0 mils. Paint film shall be uniform in color and free from blisters, sags, flaking and peeling.

d. Adequacy of paint finish to inhibit the buildup of rust on ferrous metal materials shall be tested and evaluated per paragraphs 5.2.8.1-7 of ANSI C37.20.3-1987. Salt spray withstand tests in accordance with paragraph 5.2.8.4 shall be performed on a periodic basis to provide conformance to this corrosion resistance standard of at least 2500 hours minimum (outdoor equipment) or 600 hours minimum (indoor equipment).

5. Busbars: Panelboard busbars shall be phase sequence type suitable for bolt-on circuit breakers. All busbars shall be copper, sized for a maximum current density of 1000A psi or shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL standard 891 temperature rise requirements.

6. Circuit Breakers: See specification section 26 28 16. Circuit breakers shall be the molded case type with trip and interrupting ratings as shown on the Drawings.

7. Manufacturer:

a. 208Y/120V panelboards shall be Square D NQOD or equal by Siemens, GE or Cutler Hammer - unless otherwise noted.

b. 480Y/277V panelboards shall be Square D NF or I-line or equal by Siemens, GE or Cutler Hammer - unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 27 26 Wiring Devices

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of:

a. Furnishing, installing, and connecting all duplex receptacles complete with wall plates and/or covers, as shown on the Drawings.

b. Furnishing, installing and connecting all single pole and three-way switches complete with wall plates and or handle operators, as shown on the Drawings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General - Receptacles shall be heavy duty, high abuse, grounding type conforming to NEMA WD1 and UL 498 Standards.

2. Duplex Receptacles:

a. Receptacles shall be specification grade, rated 20 ampere, two-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, NEMA 5-20 configuration, back and side wired, self-grounding with screw terminals. Color shall be white unless otherwise noted. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, industrial or hospital grade.

Page 105: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 105

b. Devices shall have a nylon composition face with a nylon or melamine body. Units shall comply with Federal Specification W-C-596 and meet UL 498 test requirements.

c. Manufacturer: Hubbell #HBL5362 Series, Leviton #5362 Series, Pass & Seymour PSL5352.

3. GFCI Receptacles:

a. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA 5-20R configuration. Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have an LED type red indicator light, test and reset push buttons. Color shall be white unless otherwise noted. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, industrial or hospital grade.

b. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31*F to 158*F. Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for protection against moisture.

c. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GF5362 Series, Leviton #6898 Series or Pass & Seymour 2094-SI.

4. GFCI Blank Face Devices:

a. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, blank face, dead front. Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have a test and reset push buttons. Color shall be white unless otherwise noted.

b. GFCI component shall meet UL 943 Class A standards with a tripping time of 1/40 second at 5 milliamperes current unbalance. Operating range shall extend from -31*F to 158*F. Unit shall have transient voltage protection and shall be ceramic encapsulated for protection against moisture.

c. Manufacturer: Hubbell #GF5350IA Series, Leviton #6490 Series, Pass and Seymour TP26-I.

5. Surge Suppression Receptacles:

a. Device shall be rated 20 ampere, 2-pole, 3-wire, 120 volt, conforming to NEMA WD1.10 configuration. Face shall be nylon composition. Unit shall have an LED type "Power-on" indication light and damage-alert audible alarm. Color shall be white unless otherwise noted.

b. Surge suppression protection shall be listed to UL 1449 and shall provide 210 joules/13,000A of surge protection in each mode. A minimum of four (4) Metal Oxide Varistors shall be utilized to absorb transients.

c. Manufacturer: Hubbell #HBL5362S Series or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 28 16 Circuit Breakers

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing circuit breakers as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

Page 106: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 106

1. Molded case circuit breakers shall be 80 percent rated unless otherwise noted. Molded case breaker with an over center toggle-type mechanism, providing quick-make, quick-break action. Each circuit breaker shall have a permanent trip unit containing individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Circuit breakers shall have variable magnetic trip elements, which are set by a single adjustment to assure uniform tripping characteristics in each pole.

2. Breakers shall be bolt-on type.

3. Breakers shall be calibrated for operation in an ambient temperature of 40*C.

4. Each circuit breaker shall have trip indication by handle position and shall be trip-free. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip.

5. The circuit breakers shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connection at either end of the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker shall be suitable for mounting and operation in any position.

6. Breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA AB1 and Federal Specifications W-C-375.

7. Circuit breakers shall have removable lugs. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum conductors. Breakers shall be UL listed for installation of mechanical screw type lugs.

8. Circuit breakers serving HACR rated loads shall be HACR type. Circuit breakers serving other motor loads shall be motor rated.

9. Breakers shall be rated as shown on Drawings.

10. Provide circuit breakers with electronic trip unit with adjustable protection settings.

a. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a MICROLOGIC electronic trip unit with true RMS sensing.

b. Current transformers shall be used to ensure accurate measurements from low current up to high currents.

c. Electronic trip unit shall be fitted with thermal imaging.

d. The following monitoring functions shall be integral parts of electronic trip units.

i. A test connector shall be installed for checks on electronic and tripping mechanism operation using an external device.

ii. Provide LED for load indication at 105 percent.

iii. Provide LED for load indication at 90 percent of load for applications 600A and smaller

iv. Provide LED for visual verification of protection circuit functionality for applications 600A or smaller.

v. Provide optional LED for trip indication for applications above 600A.

e. MICROLOGIC trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable protection settings with the capability to be set and read locally by rotating a switch.

f. Long time pickup shall allow for adjustment to nine long time pickup settings. This adjustment must be at least from 0.4 to 1 times the sensor

Page 107: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 107

plug (In), with finer adjustments available for more precise settings to match the application.

g. Manufacturer: Square D - PowerPact H Frame, J Frame, L Frame, P Frame and R Frame (15 amperes to 3000 amperes).

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 28 17 Disconnect Switches

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing disconnect switches as described herein.

2. Switches shall be of the type approved, indicated and specified herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide NEMA Type 1 disconnect switches in dry interior locations and NEMA Type 4 disconnect switches in wet locations unless otherwise noted. NEMA Type 3R is acceptable for exterior locations if installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 33 23 Single Phase Central Battery Inverter

PART 1 –General:

1. Provide a single phase, emergency backup power system capable of providing power during a utility line disturbance without interruption of power supplied to the load. The transfer from utility power to battery power shall utilize a no break (uninterruptible) system, pulse width modulated sine wave output. The system shall be capable of powering any combination of electronic, power factor corrected, fluorescent, incandescent or HID lighting; building management system, security system and any other critical voltage or frequency-sensitive electronic loads.

2. The system shall operate from 0-100% loading, and be rated to deliver its full KVA/KW rating, at unity power factor, for a minimum of 90 minutes. Upon return of the normal AC utility line power, the system shall return to standby mode automatically and without any interruption of power supplied to the load. The charging system shall recharge the batteries within UL requirements.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: The Central Battery Inverter (CBI) shall contain an inverter module and a battery module. With utility power present, the inverter power transformer is powered and the IGBT modules are microprocessor controlled to recharge the batteries. The temperature compensated battery charger circuit supplies constant voltage and constant current to the batteries. Once the batteries have received a full recharge, a constant trickle charge maintains batteries at maximum level. Recharge time shall be 24 hours maximum at nominal AC input voltage. The AC ripple current of the DC

Page 108: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 108

output meets the battery manufacturer specification, thus ensuring the maximum battery lifetime.

2. Capacity ratings:

a. The Input and Output voltage of the CBI shall be pre-configured to match the specified input and load requirements.

b. Input: 277 VAC, 1-phase, 4-wire-plus-ground.

c. Output: 277VAC, 1-phase, 4 -wire-plus-ground.

d. Output load capacity of the CBI shall be rated in kVA at unity power factor. The CBI shall be able to supply the rated kW from 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading.

e. Provide kVA ratings as shown on the drawings.

3. CBI AC Input:

a. Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: 1-phase, 2-wire-plus-ground.

b. Voltage Range: (+10%, -15%).

c. Frequency: 60 Hz. (+/- 3Hz).

d. Power Factor: 0.5 lagging / leading.

e. Inrush Current: 1.25 times nominal input current, 10 times 1 line cycle for incandescent loads.

f. Current Limit: 125% of nominal input current.

g. Current Distortion: 10% THD maximum from 50% to full load.

h. Surge Protection: Sustains input surges without damage per standards set in ANSI C62.41 (IEEE 587) & ANSI C62.42.45 (Cat. A&B).

4. CBI AC Output:

a. Voltage Configuration for Standard Units: 1-phase, 2-wire-plus-ground.

b. Static Voltage Stability: Load current changes +/- 2%, battery discharge +/- 12.5%.

c. Dynamic Voltage Stability: +/- 2% (25% step load), +/- 3% (50% step load).

d. Dynamic Recovery Time to within 1% of nominal: 3 cycles (0-100% load step).

e. Output Harmonic Distortion: < 3% (with linear load).

f. Frequency: 60 Hz (+/- .05Hz during emergency mode).

g. Load Power Factor Range: 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading.

h. Output Power Rating: kVA = kW.

i. Overload Capability: to 100% continuous rating, to 125% for 5 minutes,

to 150% for 12 line cycles

j. Crest Factor: <=2.8

5. Environmental Conditions:

a. The CBI shall be capable to of operation within the specified design and performance criteria provided that the following environmental conditions are met:

i. Storage/Transport Temperature:

Page 109: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 109

-4 to 158 deg. F (-20 to 70 deg. C) without batteries

0 to 104 deg. F (-18 to 40 deg. C) with batteries*

* Maximum recommended storage temperature for batteries is 25 deg. C for up to six months. Storage at up to 40 deg. C is acceptable for a maximum of three months

ii. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing

iii. Altitude: Operating: to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) above sea level

De-rated 5% per Km above 3 Km

iv. Storage/Transport: to 40,000 ft. (12.2 Km) above sea level.

b. Audible Noise: 45 dBA @ 1 meter from surface of the UPS.

6. The CBI shall be painted with the manufacturer’s standard color and be constructed of replaceable subassemblies. Like assemblies and like components shall be interchangeable.

7. All materials of the CBI shall be new, of current manufacture, high grade, free from defects and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing.

8. Battery cabinets shall be designed to allow stacking to minimize the overall system’s footprint. Cabinets shall require front access only for installation, adjustments and expedient servicing.

9. All components shall have a modular design and quick disconnect means to facilitate field service.

10. Cooling of the CBI shall be forced-air in emergency mode with internally mounted fans to minimize audible noise. Fans shall not operate in the battery charge / standby mode. Fan power shall be provided by the inverter.

11. Display: The CBI system shall provide operation monitoring and control, audible alarms, LED indicators, and diagnostics. The front-mounted control panel shall include a 2-line 40-character LED display, a keypad to control and monitor the internal operation of the system. Monitoring and control shall be microprocessor-based for accuracy and reliability. To ensure only authorized personnel can operate the unit, the system shall employ multi-level password protected for all control functions and parameter changes.

a. Meter functions shall provide the following measurements:

i. Utility input voltage

ii. System output voltage

iii. Battery voltage

iv. Battery current

v. System output current

vi. System output VA

vii. Inverter wattage

viii. System temperature

ix. Date & time

Page 110: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 110

b. Visual Alarms: The front panel shall integrate LEDs, to allow a quick check of the inverter operating status:

i. AC Present (Green)

ii. System Ready (Green)

iii. Battery Charging (Yellow)

iv. Battery Power (Yellow)

v. Fault (Red)

c. Audible Alarms: Audible alarm will activate with any of the following conditions and automatically store the 50 most recent events:

i. High battery charger voltage

ii. Low battery charger voltage

iii. High AC input voltage

iv. Low AC input voltage

v. Near low battery voltage

vi. Low battery voltage

vii. Load reduction fault

viii. High Ambient temperature

ix. Inverter fault

x. Output fault

xi. Output overload

12. For systems with input main voltages of 208, 240, or 480VAC the use of an isolation transformer is required. The transformer is housed in the electronics enclosure. The isolation transformer is not bypassed when optional maintenance bypass circuit is activated.

13. Inverter Module:

a. The Inverter Module shall contain an inverter, including AC distribution from an input circuit breaker, control, and monitoring subsystems.

b. The inverter modules shall convert DC voltage supplied by the battery to AC voltage of a precisely stabilized amplitude and frequency that is suitable for powering most sophisticated electrical equipment.

c. The inverter output voltage shall be generated by sinusoidal pulse width modulation (PWM). The use of a high carrier frequency for PWM and a dedicated ac filter circuit consisting of a transformer and capacitors, shall ensure a very low distortion of the output voltage (THD<3% on linear loads).

d. The inverter module shall be housed in a single freestanding NEMA type 1 enclosure.

e. Overload Capability:

i. The inverter module shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 150% of full load current for 12 line cycles, 125% for 5 minutes and 110% for 10 minutes during emergency modes.

Page 111: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 111

f. Output Power Transformer:

i. A dry type power transformer provides the inverter AC output. The transformer is built with copper wiring exclusively. The hottest winding temperature of the transformer shall not exceed the temperature limit of the transformer insulation class of material at ambient temperature.

14. Battery Charger Module:

a. The battery module shall contain the battery plant required to produce the reserve energy to supply the inverter during abnormal AC mains conditions. The battery module may be contained in an external cabinet(s) depending on the system VA.

b. The inverter shall be provided with sealed, valve regulated lead acid batteries.

c. The battery system shall be sized to provide the necessary reserve time to feed the inverter in case of a mains failure. Battery reserve shall be minimum 90 minutes.

d. The battery charger shall recharge the fully discharge batteries within a 24 hour period. The charger shall be an integrated 3 step with equalize, microprocessor controlled and temperature compensating.

e. Provide a disconnect means for isolation of battery assembly from the inverter module.

f. AC Input Current:

i. The charger unit is provided with an AC input current limiting circuit whereby the maximum input current shall not exceed 125% of the output full current rating.

g. Automatic Restart:

i. Upon restoration of utility AC power, after a utility AC power outage and after a full CBI automatic end-of-discharge shutdown, the CBI will automatically restart, performing the normal CBI start up.

h. DC Filter:

i. The charger shall have an output filter to minimize AC ripple voltage into the battery. Under no conditions shall ripple voltage into the battery exceed 2% RMS.

i. Battery Recharge:

i. The charger is capable of producing battery-charging current sufficient enough to recharge the fully discharge battery bank within a 24-hour period. After the battery is recharged, the charger shall maintain full battery charge until the next emergency operation.

j. Over-voltage Protection

i. The charger is equipped with a DC over-voltage protection circuit so that if the DC voltage rises above the pre-set limit, the charger is to shut down automatically and initiate an alarm condition.

15. Modes of Operation:

a. Normal: The inverter is normally off and the utility AC power continuously supplies the critical load. The input converter (bi-directional transformer)

Page 112: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 112

derives power from the utility AC power source and supplies to the inverter while simultaneously providing floating charge to the batteries.

b. Emergency: Upon failure of the utility AC power the inverter instantaneously with a maximum of a 2-millisecond break, switches its power supply from the input converter to the battery system. There shall be no loss of power to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility source.

c. Recharge: Upon restoration of utility AC power after a power outage, the input inverter shall automatically restart and start charging the batteries. Critical loads are powered by the utility AC power again.

16. Manufacturer: ISI UFT Series or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 50 00 Lighting

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of providing a lighting system complete, including fixtures, lamps, bracing, hangers, reflectors, glassware, lenses, poles, bases, auxiliary equipment, ballasts and sockets.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Fixtures shall be of the types, wattages, and voltages shown on the Drawings and comply with UL 1598.

2. Substitutions will not be considered unless the photometric distribution curve indicates the proposed fixture is equal to or exceeds the specified luminaire.

3. Luminaire wire and the current carrying capacity thereof shall be in accordance with the CEC.

4. Luminaires and lighting equipment shall be delivered to the project site complete, with suspension accessories, aircraft cable, stems, canopies, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders, ballasts, diffusers, frames, supports, braces, and related items.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATONS SECTION 27 05 00 General Requirements for Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment (except equipment furnished by the Owner to be installed by the Contractor) to satisfactorily complete the work shown on the drawings and/or specified in all Sections of Division 27 and all other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but reasonably inferred for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

Page 113: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 113

a. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated communication systems.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Material and Equipment:

a. Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period includes use of equipment and materials of similar size under similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product

2. Service Support:

a. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations including their addresses and qualification for support of the equipment. These service organizations shall be convenient to the equipment installation and able to render service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract

3. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:

a. Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendation shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 05 28.32 Junction And Pull Boxes For Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations shown on the drawings, included in these Specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

PART 2 –Products:

1. For boxes in dry interior locations use NEMA 1 box. For boxes in wet or exterior locations use NEMA 4 box. NEMA 3R is acceptable for exterior locations if installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Standard Outlet Boxes, per UL 514A: Galvanized, one-piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

Page 114: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 114

3. Switch boxes, per UL 514A: Two inch wide by three inches long galvanized steel switch boxes shall be used only for the installation of single switches. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable for the application indicated.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

4. Cast metal Outlet Boxes per UL 514A: Four inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required. Boxes shall be furnished with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and with neoprene cover gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds VXF series, Appleton JBX series or approved equal.

5. Conduit bodies per UL 514A: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of controls or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets, or approved equal.

6. Sheet Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 box sized to Code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers.

a. Manufacturer: Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or approved equal.

7. Cast Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron junction boxes with bolt-on, interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Appleton RS series, Crouse-Hinds RS series, or approved equal.

8. Flush Mounted Pull boxes and Junction boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 05 28.33 Raceways And Fittings For Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and fittings for above grade installations, underground duct installations and inside buildings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

Page 115: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 115

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Uni-couple EMT is acceptable.

3. Flexible conduit: Flexible metal conduit (Greenfield) shall be galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked from a continuous metal strip and shall conform to UL 1 and FS A-A-55810.

4. Liquidtight flexible conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be liquid-tight (Sealtight) of galvanized steel interlocked from a continuous metal strip with an extruded polyvinyl chloride cover and shall conform to UL 360 and FS A-A-55810.

5. Rigid non-metallic conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit for concrete encasement shall be Type EB, all others shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40 or NEMA TC2 Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90C wires, and shall conform to UL 651.

a. Conduit for use for utility feeders shall comply with utility requirements.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 05 28.34 Rooftop Conduit Support For Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber conduit and box supports for electrical conduit systems on roofs.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a support capacity of 2500 pounds per linear foot of support.

a. Provide appropriate documentation associated with the recycled product to assist with LEEDtm Certification.

2. Each base to have a reflective yellow stripe.

3. Dimensions are to be six inches wide by height and width as required.

4. Steel frame is to be 14 gauge galvanized for D and CE series and 12 gauge strut galvanized for CB and CS series.

5. Attaching hardware is to be zinc plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.

6. Manufacturer: B-Line C-Port series or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 05 28.36 Communications Ladder Rack

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all labor, materials, and equipment for the complete installation of a ladder rack type cable management system for support of communications cabling.

Page 116: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 116

PART 2 –Products:

1. Provide all components of the ladder rack system (ladder rack, turns, splices, supports, and accessories) from a single manufacturer.

2. Finish shall be gray black epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat paint.

3. Ladder Rack:

a. Ladder rack shall be manufactured from tubular steel. Stringers (sides) will be made from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness. Cross members (rungs) will be made from 1” wide by ½” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness.

b. Ladder rack (stringers) will be 9’-8½ “ long. Cross members will be welded in between stringers on 9” centers beginning 4-1/4” from one end so that there are thirteen cross members per ladder rack. There will be 8” of open space in between each cross member.

c. Manufacturer: Chatsworth Products, Inc., TELCO-Style Cable Runway, 11252 Series or approved equal.

4. Horizontal 90° Turns:

a. Horizontal 90° turns shall be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness.

b. Stringers (sides) will be formed in a 90° arc. Cross members will be welded in between stringers on approximate 23° increments so that there are 5 cross members per turn. The welded assembly will have a 15” inside radius and will create a smooth horizontal 90° turn.

c. Manufacturer: Chatsworth Products, Inc., Cable Runway E-Bend, 10822 Series or approved equal.

5. Vertical-To-Horizontal 90° Turns:

a. Vertical-to-horizontal 90° turns shall be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness.

b. Stringers (sides) shall be formed in a 90° arc with a 12-1/2” outside radius. Cross members will be welded in between stringers on approximate 23° increments so that there are 3 cross members per turn. The welded assembly will create a smooth 90° vertical-to-horizontal turn.

c. Manufacturer: Chatsworth Products, Inc., Cable Runway Outside Radius Bend, 10723 Series or approved equal.

6. Corner Brackets:

a. Corner brackets shall be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness.

b. The inside stringers of the corner bracket shall be formed at 90° with a small chamfer at the vertex. The outside stringer of the corner bracket shall be formed in a 90° arc that is either 15” or 24” in radius. A single cross member will connect the chamfered portion of the inside stringer to the outside stringer. The welded assembly shall create a smooth 90° turn within the L-shaped corner created by two intersecting ladder racks.

c. Corner brackets will be available in the size(s) specified below. Installation hardware will be included with the corner bracket. Corner bracket

Page 117: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 117

installation hardware does not include the junction splice kit required to form the L-shaped intersection between two ladder racks.

d. Manufacturer: Chatsworth Products, Inc., Cable Runway Corner Bracket, 11959 Series or approved equal.

7. Ladder Rack Splices:

a. Splice kits shall provide a method of mechanically connecting ladder rack sections and turns together end-to-end or side-to-end to form a continuous pathway for cables.

b. Grounding kits shall provide a method of bonding ladder rack sections and turns together that is independent of the pathway splices. The grounding kit shall be constructed of UL Listed components. Utilize a #6 AWG green insulated stranded copper conductor connected on both ends to ladder rack using two-hole compression lugs and stainless steel hardware.

c. Splices (splice plates) will be manufactured from steel. Splice, grounding and insulator bar kits will include installation hardware.

d. Manufacturer: Chatsworth Products, Inc., Runway Splice and Grounding Kits, 11298, 11299, 12061-001 or approved equal.

8. Ladder Rack Supports:

a. Provide supports as recommended by the manufacturer.

b. Supports shall be sized to match the width of the ladder rack that is supported.

c. Each support will include a means of securing ladder rack to the support.

d. Supports shall be manufactured from steel or aluminum.

9. Ladder Rack Accessories:

a. Provide accessories as recommended by the manufacturer.

b. Cable straps used for attaching cable bundles to the ladder rack cross members must be reusable with a hook and loop-style closure, at least ¾” wide, and sized for cable bundles that are 2”, 3” or 4” in diameter.

c. Cable retaining posts used to keep cable from falling off of the side of the ladder rack shall be manufactured from 1” by ½” tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness. Cable retaining posts will be 8” high and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack with included hardware. The top of the cable retaining posts will be fitted with a rubberized end cap to protect cables.

d. End caps used to cover the ends of ladder rack will be manufactured from a black fire-retardant rubberized material. End caps will be sized for 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high side stingers and will be sold in pairs.

e. End closing kits used to cover the end of ladder rack will be manufactured from 3/8” wide by 1-1/2” high tubular steel with 0.065” wall thickness. Kits will consist of a bar cut to match the width of the ladder rack and the hardware required to attach the bar to the end of a length of ladder rack.

f. Radius drops used to create a radius to form cables over as the cables exit or enter the ladder rack will be manufactured from aluminum extrusion. The extrusion will be formed in a 90° arc with a minimum bend radius of 3”. Radius drops will attach to either the side stringer or the cross member of the ladder rack using a clevis pin. Radius drops will include 1-1/2” high cable spools that attach to the top of the radius drop to guide cables.

Page 118: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 118

g. Movable cross members used to support cross member radius drops in between welded cross members on ladder rack will be manufactured from 3/8” by 1-1/2” aluminum bar. Movable cross members will attach to ladder rack at the side stringers with included hardware so that the location of the movable cross member can be adjusted. Moveable cross member will support a cross member radius drop.

h. Cable spools used to separate ladder rack into multiple cable pathways will be made from a black flame retardant ABS. Cable spools will attach to the cross members with a clip that allows the width of the ladder rack to be divided into any proportion. The spools will be 3.94” tall, with a 1.94” diameter top, and a body that tapers from 0.88” (diameter) at the top to 0.62” (diameter) at the bottom.

i. Auxiliary support brackets used to support cables that should be physically separated from the cables in the ladder rack will be made from 1/8” x 1” steel bar. The bracket will be L-shaped and will attach to the side stringer of the ladder rack. The bracket will hang below the ladder rack a minimum of 4”. The bracket support surface will be 4” long. The bracket will be zinc plated with a gold chem. finish.

j. Touch-up paint used on ladder rack and ladder rack system components will be color-matched to the finish on the ladder rack or component. A spray on and brush on option will be available.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 05 43 Underground Ducts And Raceways For Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing raceways, raceway spacers, reinforcing steel, anchors and encasing material with necessary excavation for underground ducts.

2. Encasement - Encasement shall be sand or concrete, at the Contractor's option, for all other raceways.

3. Where required - All raceways for medium voltage cable and all other raceways, where run underground and in excavation shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of this Section. Conduits run underground without encasement shall be as indicated in the Drawings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. As specified in Section 27 05 28.33 Communication System Raceways and Fittings.

2. Spacers:

a. Molded plastic as furnished by the raceway manufacturer, to cradle and position the raceways in the excavation for placing the encasement.

b. Shape to accurately fit the raceway, provide the correct raceway spacing, to interlock in place and stack.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 119: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 119

SECTION 27 05 44 In Grade Pull Boxes For Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of providing all labor, supervision, tools, materials, and performing all work necessary to furnish and install pre-cast concrete pull boxes with necessary excavation.

PART 2 –Product:

1. General Requirements:

a. Concrete pull boxes for electrical power, controls and other communication circuits shall consist of pre-cast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions' bases, and covers as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Pre-cast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes. Acceptable manufacturers are Christy, Utility Vault, Brooks, or approved equal.

2. Construction:

a. Pre-cast concrete pull boxes for electrical power distribution and communication circuits with associated risers shall conform to ACI 318. Pull box tops in non-traffic areas shall conform to ACI 318. Pull boxes shall be the type noted on the Drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as shown. Walls shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls shall be of monolithic concrete construction.

3. Covers:

a. The word "SIGNAL" shall be cast in the top face of all telecom, intercom, CATV, data, EMS, security and/or clock cable boxes.

4. Concrete:

a. Aggregates used in the concrete mix, either coarse or fine, excluding light weight aggregates, shall conform to ASTM C33. Aggregates shall be properly graded and free of deleterious substances to produce a homogeneous concrete mix when blended with cement.

5. Cement:

a. The cement shall be Type II low alkali Portland cement and shall meet the requirement of ASTM C150.

6. Compressive Strength:

a. Sufficient cement content shall be used per batch to produce a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.

7. Reinforcing Steel:

a. Welded wire mesh for street lighting boxes shall conform to ASTM A 185.

b. Reinforcing bars for primary and secondary electrical pull boxes, and communication pull boxes shall be intermediate grade billet steel conforming to ASTM A615.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 120: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 120

SECTION 27 10 00 Wired and Cables for Communication Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: Conductors shall be copper, Class B stranded and of the sizes indicated. All conductors 120 volts and above shall be in raceway unless otherwise noted. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise specified by the Owner's Representative. All cable used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2. Unless otherwise noted, conductors #6 and larger shall be XHHW insulation suitable for operation in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 75C in wet locations and 90C in dry locations. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be THHN in dry locations and THWN/THHN in wet locations. Control Cable shall be THHN.

3. Insulation Marking: All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

4. Color Coding: As specified in paragraph 3.03.

5. Special Wiring: Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the special wiring requirements to the Owner's Representative and, if approved, provide same. Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.

6. Other Wiring: Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

7. Terminations:

a. Cable Termination for Copper: Crimp style two hole NEMA spade terminals designed and rated for copper cable.

b. Wire Terminations: Crimp on ring-tongue terminals, insulated sleeve, of proper size for the wire used.

c. End Seals: Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

d. Manufacturer: T&B, Burndy or approved equal.

8. Manufacturer: BICC General Cable Inc., Southwire, or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 20 00 Data Communications

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing components for the data communication systems. Provide racks, cabinets, pathways, boxes, cabling, terminations, patch cords, patch panels, jacks and testing as required.

Page 121: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 121

PART 2 –Products:

1. Fiber Optic Termination Panel (patch panel):

a. Minimum performance specifications: Suitable for use with specified Fiber Optic cables. Must meet requirements of TIA/EIA T586B.

2. Provide Zirconia Ceramic sleeve, SC - type ports.

3. Panels shall be wall mounted with minimum capacity for 12 fiber connections.

a. Manufacturer: Leviton 5W120-00N, 5F100-9ZT or approved equal.

4. Provide cable management ring in the back of the panels or other means of securing cables being terminated. Ensure wire management maintains recommended bend radius, and has storage for up to 2 meters of excess cable per coupling.

5. Store 2 meters of excess cable in purpose designed cable storage.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 27 30 00 Voice Communications

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing components for voice communications systems. Provide racks, cabinets, pathways, boxes, cabling, terminations, patch panels, 66 and/or 110 blocks, jacks and testing as required.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Unless otherwise noted, provide single gang, modular voice outlets.

2. Voice Jacks must meet the minimum performance specifications for Category 6a of EIA/TIA. All 8-position, modular jack inserts for telephone locations shall comply with EIA/TIA T568B specifications.

a. Modular jacks shall be engraved 'Cat 6a’ on the face of the jack insert.

3. Contractor shall coordinate data wiring scheme (T568B or T568A) with owner.

4. All components shall be UL listed.

5. Unless otherwise indicated provide insert and faceplate colors:

a. Single gang wall plate, white with two labels and label covers.

b. Provide 4 port unless otherwise noted, coordinate number of ports with drawings.

c. Voice jack, gray.

d. Blank jack (where applicable), white.

6. Manufacturer: Ortronics OR-KSFP series or approved equal.

7. For outdoor installation install outlets in weatherproof, white, polycarbonate in use cover.

a. Manufacturer: Taymac MM410W or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 122: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 122

SECTION 27 41 16.6 Assitive Listening System

PART 1 –General:

1. Furnish and install all materials and equipment including all required equipment and connectors, and provide all labor required and necessary to complete the work shown on the drawings and/or specified in all Sections of Division 27 and all other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but reasonably inferred for a complete assistive listening system. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications that the system be complete, coordinated with the existing local sound system, and ready for operation.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General: The system shall provide for portable, wireless, FM based local distribution of voice and music from the local sound system through the assistive listening system to wireless stereo receivers with headsets. The system shall be portable and of modular design to facilitate expansion and shall be completely solid state.

a. Work included in this Section: Complete wireless assistive listening system Including but not limited to the following:

i. Digital Wireless Transmitter

ii. Wireless Stereo Receivers with Headsets

iii. Charger and Carrying Case

iv. Test, operational check and demonstration of system operation

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

DIVISION 28 – SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 05 00 General Requirements for Safety and Security Systems

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment (except equipment furnished by the Owner to be installed by the Contractor) to satisfactorily complete the work shown on the drawings and/or specified in all Sections of Division 28 and all other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but reasonably inferred for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all required in-place equipment, conduits, conductors, cables and any miscellaneous materials for the satisfactory interconnection and operation of all associated electrical systems.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Material and Equipment:

a. Provide materials and equipment that are new and are current products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to bid opening. The two-year period includes use of

Page 123: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 123

equipment and materials of similar size under similar circumstances. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product.

2. Service Support:

a. Submit a certified list of qualified permanent service organizations including their addresses and qualification for support of the equipment. These service organizations shall be convenient to the equipment installation and able to render service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.

3. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:

a. Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to furnish recommendation shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 26 05 13 Wire and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all wire and cable rated 600 volts or less, including splices and terminations, as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General:

a. Conductors shall be copper, Class B stranded and of the sizes indicated. All conductors 120 volts and above shall be in raceway unless otherwise noted. Minimum power and control wire size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise specified by the Owner's Representative. All cable used on this Project shall be of the same type and conductor material.

2. Unless otherwise noted, conductors #6 and larger shall be XHHW insulation suitable for operation in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 75*C in wet locations and 90*C in dry locations. Conductors #8 and smaller shall be THHN in dry locations and THWN/THHN in wet locations. Control Cable shall be THHN.

3. Insulation Marking:

a. All insulated conductors shall be identified with printing colored to contrast with the insulation color.

4. Special Wiring:

a. Where special wiring is proposed by an equipment manufacturer, submit the special wiring requirements to the Owner's Representative and, if approved, provide same. Special wire shall be the type required by the equipment manufacturer.

5. Other Wiring:

Page 124: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 124

a. Wire or cable not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified, but required, shall be of the type and size required for the application and as approved by the Owner's Representative.

6. Terminations:

a. Cable Termination for Copper: Crimp style two hole NEMA spade terminals designed and rated for copper cable.

b. Wire Terminations: Crimp on ring-tongue terminals, insulated sleeve, of proper size for the wire used.

c. End Seals: Heat shrink plastic caps of proper size for the wire on which used.

d. Manufacturer: T&B, Burndy or approved equal.

7. Manufacturer: BICC General Cable Inc., Southwire, or approved equal

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 28.32 Junction and Pull Boxes for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete all electrical installations shown on the drawings, included in these Specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all required material, supports and miscellaneous material for the satisfactory interconnection of all associated electrical systems.

PART 2 –Products:

1. For boxes in dry interior locations use NEMA 1 box. For boxes in wet or exterior locations use NEMA 4 box. NEMA 3R is acceptable for exterior locations if installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Standard Outlet Boxes, per UL 514A: Galvanized, one-piece die formed or drawn steel, knockout type of size and configuration best suited to the application indicated on the Drawings. Minimum box size shall be 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with mud rings as required.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

3. Switch boxes, per UL 514A: Two inch wide by three inches long galvanized steel switch boxes shall be used only for the installation of single switches. Install multiple switches in standard gang boxes with raised device covers suitable for the application indicated.

a. Manufacturer: RACO or approved equal.

4. Cast metal Outlet Boxes per UL 514A: Four inch round, galvanized cast iron alloy with threaded hubs and mounting lugs as required. Boxes shall be furnished with cast cover plates of the same material as the box and with neoprene cover gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds VXF series, Appleton JBX series or approved equal.

Page 125: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 125

5. Conduit bodies per UL 514A: Cadmium plated, cast iron alloy. Conduit bodies with threaded conduit hubs and neoprene gasketed, cast iron covers. Bodies shall be used to facilitate pulling of controls or to make changes in conduit direction only. Splices are not permitted in conduit bodies.

a. Manufacturer: Crouse-Hinds Form 8 Condulets, Appleton Form 35 Unilets, or approved equal.

6. Sheet Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard outlet or concrete ring boxes wherever possible; otherwise use a minimum 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal, NEMA 1 box sized to Code requirements with covers secured by cadmium plated machine screws located six inches on centers.

a. Manufacturer: Circle AW Products, Hoffman Engineering Company or approved equal.

7. Cast Metal Boxes per UL 50: Use standard cast malleable iron outlet or device boxes wherever possible; otherwise use cadmium plated, cast malleable iron junction boxes with bolt-on, interchangeable conduit hub plates with neoprene gaskets.

a. Manufacturer: Appleton RS series, Crouse-Hinds RS series, or approved equal.

8. Flush Mounted Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes:

a. Provide overlapping covers with flush head cover retaining screws, prime coated.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 28.33 Raceways and Fittings for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing conduits, raceways and fittings for above grade installations, underground duct installations and inside buildings as shown on the Drawings and as described herein.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Uni-couple EMT is acceptable.

3. Flexible conduit: Flexible metal conduit (Greenfield) shall be galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked from a continuous metal strip and shall conform to UL 1 and FS A-A-55810.

4. Liquidtight flexible conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be liquid-tight (Sealtight) of galvanized steel interlocked from a continuous metal strip with an extruded polyvinyl chloride cover and shall conform to UL 360 and FS A-A-55810.

5. Rigid non-metallic conduit: Rigid non-metallic conduit for concrete encasement shall be Type EB, all others shall be PVC Schedule 40 (PVC-40

Page 126: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 126

or NEMA TC2 Type EPC-40) conduit approved for underground use and for use with 90*C wires, and shall conform to UL 651:

a. Conduit for use for utility feeders shall comply with utility requirements.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 28.34 Rooftop Conduit Support for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and accessories, and performing all operations required for the correct installation of recycled rubber conduit and box supports for electrical conduit systems on roofs.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Roof Conduit Support System:

2. Curb base must be made of 100% recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a support capacity of 2500 pounds per linear foot of support:

a. Provide appropriate documentation associated with the recycled product to assist with LEEDtm Certification.

3. Each base to have a reflective yellow stripe.

4. Dimensions are to be six inches wide by height and width as required.

5. Steel frame is to be 14 gauge galvanized for D and CE series and 12 gauge strut galvanized for CB and CS series.

6. Attaching hardware is to be zinc plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633.

7. Manufacturer: B-Line C-Port series or approved equal.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 28.39 Surface Metal Raceway for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this Section consists of providing all required labor, supervision, materials and equipment to satisfactorily complete electrical installation shown on the drawings or in these specifications, or otherwise needed for a complete and fully operating facility. The work shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Furnish and install all Raceway and appropriate fittings and boxes to install a Steel Surface Raceway System as indicated on the electrical drawings and described in this section. Installer shall comply fully with the manufacturer's instructions, and with electrical and safety codes.

PART 2 –Products:

1. The galvanized steel surface raceway systems specified herein for safety or security wiring shall be Wiremold V700 Series manufactured or approved equal by Hubbell or Panduit.

Page 127: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 127

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing raceways, raceway spacers, reinforcing steel, anchors and encasing material with necessary excavation for underground ducts.

2. Encasement - Encasement shall be sand or concrete, at the Contractor's option, for all other raceways.

3. Where required - All raceways for medium voltage cable and all other raceways, where run underground and in excavation, shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of this Section. Conduits run underground without encasement shall be as indicated in the Drawings.

PART 2 –Products:

1. As specified in Section 28 05 28.33 Safety/System Raceways and Fittings.

2. Spacers:

a. Molded plastic as furnished by the raceway manufacturer, to cradle and position the raceways in the excavation for placing the encasement.

b. Shape to accurately fit the raceway, provide the correct raceway spacing, to interlock in place and stack.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 05 44 In Grade Pull Boxes for Electronic Safety and Security

PART 1 –General:

1. The work of this section consists of providing all labor, supervision, tools, materials, and performing all work necessary to furnish and install pre-cast concrete pull boxes with necessary excavation.

PART 2 –Products:

1. General Requirements:

a. Concrete pull boxes for electrical power, controls and other communication circuits shall consist of pre-cast reinforced concrete boxes, extensions' bases, and covers as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. Pre-cast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of pre-cast vaults and pull boxes. Acceptable manufacturers are Christy, Utility Vault, Brooks, or approved equal.

2. Construction:

a. Pre-cast concrete pull boxes for electrical power distribution and communication circuits with associated risers shall conform to ACI 318. Pull box tops in non-traffic areas shall conform to ACI 318. Pull boxes shall be the type noted on the Drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as shown. Walls shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls shall be of monolithic concrete construction.

Page 128: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

00 01 20 Lionakis No. 014145 Outline Specifications January 19, 2015 Page 128

3. Covers:

a. The words "FIRE ALARM" shall be cast in the top face of all fire alarm cable boxes.

b. The word "SIGNAL" shall be cast in the top face of all telecom, intercom, CATV, data, EMS, security and/or clock cable boxes.

4. Concrete:

a. Aggregates used in the concrete mix, either coarse or fine, excluding light weight aggregates, shall conform to ASTM C33. Aggregates shall be properly graded and free of deleterious substances to produce a homogeneous concrete mix when blended with cement.

5. Cement:

a. The cement shall be Type II low alkali Portland cement and shall meet the requirement of ASTM C150.

6. Compressive Strength:

a. Sufficient cement content shall be used per batch to produce a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.

7. Reinforcing Steel:

a. Welded wire mesh for street lighting boxes shall conform to ASTM A 185.

b. Reinforcing bars for primary and secondary electrical pullboxes, and communication pull boxes shall be intermediate grade billet steel conforming to ASTM A615.

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

SECTION 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm

PART 1 –General:

1. Furnish and install all materials and equipment including all required equipment, panels, raceways, conductors and connections, and provide all labor required and necessary to complete the work shown on the drawings and/or specified and all other work and miscellaneous items, not specifically mentioned, but reasonably inferred for a complete addressable fire alarm installation including all accessories and appurtenances required for testing the systems. It is the intent of the drawings and specifications that all systems be complete, and ready for operation. No extra charge will be paid for furnishing items required by regulations, but not specified herein, or on drawings.

2. See site drawings for specific requirements for the site.

PART 2 –Products:

1. Products listed below are to establish minimum criteria:

a. Fire Alarm System shall be FCI ES with voice evacuation

PART 3 –Execution: Not Used

Page 129: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 00 01 20 January 19, 2015 Outline Specifications Page 129

DIVISIONS 29 & 30 – NOT USED

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

SECTION 31 20 00 Earthwork – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 31 23 19 Dewatering – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 31 23 33 Trenching and Backfilling – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 31 25 13 Erosion Controls – Section Attached at the End.

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS – DIVISION 32 SECTIONS ATTACHED AT THE END

SECTION 32 11 23 Aggregate Base – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 12 16 Asphaltic Concrete Paving – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 16 13 Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Walks – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 14 40 Stone Surfacing – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 90 00 Sodding – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 91 14 Bioretention Soil – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 32 96 00 Planting – Section Attached at the End.

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – DIVISION 33 SECTIONS ATTACHED AT THE END

SECTION 33 05 16 Utility Structures – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 33 11 16 Site Water Distribution System – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 33 30 00 Site Sanitary Sewerage System – Section Attached at the End.

SECTION 33 40 00 Site Drainage System – Section Attached at the End.

DIVISIONS 34 TO 49 – NOT USED

END OF OUTLINE SPECIFICATIONS

Page 130: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

ADDITIONAL DIVISION 01 SECTIONS

Page 131: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 01 56 39 January 19, 2015 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection

Page 1

SECTION 01 56 39

TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.

B. Description of Work:

1. Protection of existing trees and vegetation to remain.

2. Trimming of existing trees.

3. Maintenance of existing trees during construction.

4. Removal of existing trees and other vegetation.

C. Traffic:

1. Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of the District.

2. Do not interfere with adjacent private properties without permission of the District.

D. Site Utilities:

1. Advise utility companies of excavation activities before starting excavations.

2. Locate and identify underground utilities passing through work area before start-ing work.

3. In event unidentified underground utilities are encountered during work, advise utility owner immediately before proceeding. Add any new utility information to project record drawings for actual location.

4. Protect all existing-to-remain utilities.

5. Do not interrupt existing utilities without advance notice to and approval from the District.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm.

B. Certification: From arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain have been protected during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.

C. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, for care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing the Work.

Page 132: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

01 56 39 Lionakis No. 014145 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection January 19, 2015 Page 2

D. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.

2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Arborist Qualifications: Certified Arborist as certified by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) and having performed similar services for a minimum of five (5) years.

B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.

3. Foot traffic.

4. Erection of sheds or structures.

5. Impoundment of water.

6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.

C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch.

1.6 Definitions

A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at six (6) inches above the ground for trees up to, and including, four (4) inch size; and twelve (12) inches above the ground for trees larger than four (4) inch size.

B. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

C. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius equal to the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.

D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

Page 133: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 01 56 39 January 19, 2015 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection

Page 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE PROTECTION PROTECTIVE FENCE

A. Existing shrubs and/or trees to remain on the school site shall be protected with a six (6) foot high, chain link fence. Fence shall be mounted on two (2) inch diameter galvanized steel posts driven into the ground every six (6) feet to a depth of at least two (2) feet. Fence shall be erected and installed around the perimeter dripline of each shrub, tree or groups of shrubs or trees to remain.

B. During planting and irrigation operations, protective fencing is not required beneath existing to remain trees and shrubs that fall within the newly landscaped and/or irrigation area.

2.2 TOPSOIL

A. Natural or cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured topsoil; containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than one (1) inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic and other non-soil materials.

2.3 ORGANIC MULCH

A. Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of shredded bark, three (3) inches to ½ inch in size, submit standard available colors to Owner’s Representative for approval.

END OF SECTION

Page 134: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015
Page 135: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

ADDITIONAL DIVISION 02 SECTIONS

Page 136: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 02 41 14 January 19, 2015 Site Utility Demolition Page 1

SECTION 02 41 14

SITE UTILITY DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Demolition and removal of site utilities, as indicated.

B. Extent of demolition work shall be as follows:

1. Abandoned portion at the limits shall be capped with concrete and/or pipe fittings

as determined by the engineer.

B. Restoration of existing structures and facilities to remain in place which are damaged by demolition and removal operations.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 312000 - Earth Moving.

B. Section 312319 - Dewatering.

C. Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

D. Section 312513 - Erosion Controls.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A10.6 Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CCR Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4 – Construction Safety Orders

2. CCR Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Chapter 33, Section 3303,

Protection of Pedestrians during Construction or Demolition

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND FACILITIES

Page 137: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

02 41 14 Lionakis No. 014145 Site Utility Demolition January 19, 2015 Page 2

A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for providing the necessary protection, demolition, and removal work.

A. Provide backup equipment as necessary for the replacement and for unanticipated

emergencies.

END OF SECTION

Page 138: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

DIVISION 31 SECTIONS

Page 139: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 31 20 00 January 19, 2015 Earthwork Page 1

SECTION 31 20 00

EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for the excavation, filling, recompacting, grading and disposal of excess material.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 23 19 – Dewatering B. Section 31 23 33 – Trenching and Backfilling C. Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C136-84a – Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate

B. ASTM D1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

C. ASTM D2922 – Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

D. Caltrans – State of California Standard Specifications, latest edition

E. Geotechnical Report – “Geotechnical Hazards Assessment and Geotechnical Evaluation New Academic Building” prepared by Ninyo & Moore, dated November 21, 2014

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Compaction

1. The degree of compaction is specified as percent compaction. Maximum densities refer to the maximum laboratory dry soil densities obtainable at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557.

2. Percent compaction (relative compaction) is the ratio of the measured field dry

density to the laboratory maximum dry density.

B. Excavation Slope: Excavation slope shall be defined as an inclined surface formed by removing material from below existing grade.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS

A. Class 2 Aggregate Base

Page 140: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

31 20 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Earthwork January 19, 2015 Page 2

1. Class 2 aggregate base for subsequent backfill and/or pavement base to be ¾

inches maximum Class 2 aggregate base conforming to Caltrans, Section 26. Class 2 aggregate base material shall have a minimum R-Value of 78.

2. Materials specifications and procedures shall conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications, latest edition, except 95% relative compaction based on maximum dry density (ASTM 1557) instead of Caltrans Test Method 216 should be obtained in the baserock (and the subbase if used) and in the upper six inches of soil subgrade.

3. Classification of Fill - 95% Relative Compaction - Class 2 Aggregate Base.

4. Native Backfill - Use of native material is allowed only when written approval from

the Geotechnical Engineer has been given.

5. Quicklime:

a. Shall have minimum temperature rise of 30 degrees C in 20 minutes as measured by ASTM C 110.

b. Shall not have more than 10 percent residue as measured by ASTM C 110. 2.1 EQUIPMENT

1. Lime Spreaders:

a. Only lime spreaders that are calibrated and able to provide uniform spreading at the designated rate by mechanical means shall be used.

b. Tailgate spreading of the lime will not be permitted. Tailgate spreading is defined as having manual control of the spread rate, instead of automatic control.

2. Mixers:

a. Mixing equipment shall be equipped with a visible depth indicator showing

mixing depth and odometer to indicate travel speed, and a controllable water additive system for regulating water added to the mixture.

b. Mixing equipment shall be of the type that can mix to the full depth of the desire thickness and leave a relatively smooth bottom of the treated section.

END OF SECTION

Page 141: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 31 23 19 January 19, 2015 Dewatering Page 1

SECTION 31 23 19

DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications and procedure for the dewatering of excavations and disposal of water. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for providing the necessary dewatering work and facilities.

B. Provide backup equipment as necessary for the replacement and for unanticipated

emergencies.

END OF SECTION

Page 142: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015
Page 143: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 31 23 33 January 19, 2015 Trenching and Backfilling Page 1

SECTION 31 23 33

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for excavating, backfilling and compacting for the installation of pipe and pipeline appurtenances (i.e. manholes, catch basins, area drains, etc.)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earthmoving

B. Section 31 23 19 - De-watering C. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AT&T Standard Specifications - Latest Edition B. California Plumbing Code - Latest Edition C. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Drawings - Latest Edition D. City of Ukiah Standard Plans and Specifications - Latest edition

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Trench backfill shall consist of Class 2 Aggregate Base, unless otherwise noted. Trench backfill shall meet the requirements listed with Section 9.1.5 of the Geotechnical Report.

2.2 PIPING MATERIAL

A. All piping material shall conform to the California Plumbing Code. 2.3 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE

A. Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3-inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, ‘CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW” or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

1. Warning Tape Color Codes.

Red: Electric.

Page 144: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

31 23 33 Lionakis No. 014145 Trenching and Backfilling January 19, 2015 Page 2

Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials. Orange: Telephone and Other Communications. Blue: Water Systems. Green: Sewer Systems. White: Steam Systems. Grey: Compressed Air.

2. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic

tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

3. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping: Polyethylene plastic tape

conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3-feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

2.4 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING

A. Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.

END OF SECTION

Page 145: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 31 25 13 January 19, 2015 Erosion Controls Page 1

SECTION 31 25 13

EROSION CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Slope protection, erosion control, and rip rap placement, and shall consist of all permanent and temporary erosion control features as indicated for the purpose of preventing on-site erosion and maintaining all sediments within the project boundaries and comply with the requirements of the District.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EROSION CONTROL BLANKETS

A. Erosion control blankets shall be North American Green single net straw blanket, Western Excelsior excel SR-1, or equivalent.

2.2 FIBER ROLLS

A. Fiber rolls shall be netted tubes, at least 12 inches in diameter, filled with straw or equivalent biodegradable product. Installation shall be in accordance with "Erosion and Sediment Control Field Manual" (latest edition) by the California Regional Water Quality Control Board, San Francisco Bay Region.

2.3 STRAW BALES

A. Use standard clean straw bales bound with wire. 2.4 SILT FENCE

A. Silt fence shall be per "Erosion and Sediment Control Field Manual" (latest edition) by the California Regional Water Quality Control Board, San Francisco Bay Region.

2.5 RIP RAP

A. Rip rap shall conform to the weight requirement of Caltrans Section 72 for light rip rap.

A. Geotextile fabric shall be Mirafi 600X Filter Fabric or equivalent.

Page 146: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

31 25 13 Lionakis No. 014145 Erosion Controls January 19, 2015 Page 2

B. Placing

1. The Contractor shall place a geotextile stabilization fabric over the areas to

receive rip rap. Fabric edges shall overlap at least one and one-half feet.

2. Rip rap shall be placed to the line, grade and depth shown on the plans. Rip rap shall be placed in such a fashion (Caltrans Method A Placement) as not to puncture or tear the underlying fabric. The contractor shall replace torn sections of fabric with a piece of the same fabric. Fabric overlap in these areas shall be at least three feet.

3. Rip rap shall be placed in such a manner that the material does not segregate

itself into areas of larger and smaller rip rap. 2.6 ROCK FILTER

A. Rock to be used for the rock filters and for the protection of the construction entrance shall consist of Class 1, Type B Drain Rock conforming to Caltrans Section 68, unless otherwise noted.

2.7 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND FACILITIES

A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for providing

the necessary erosion controls. B. Provide backup equipment as necessary for the replacement and for unanticipated

emergencies.

END OF SECTION

Page 147: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

ADDITIONAL DIVISION 32 SECTIONS

Page 148: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 11 23 January 19, 2015 Aggregate Base Page 1

SECTION 32 11 23

AGGREGATE BASE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for furnishing, spreading, and compacting aggregate base course for pavements as indicated.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM D2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D3017 Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

B. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Specifications:

Section 17 Watering

Section 26 Aggregate Bases

C. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Test Methods:

Calif. Test 201 Method of Soil and Aggregate Sample Preparation Aggregates Calif. Test 202 Method of Tests for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates Calif. Test 205 Method of Determining Percentage of Crushed Particles Calif. Test 216 Method of Test for Relative Compaction of Untreated and Treated Soils and Aggregates

Calif. Test 217 Method of Test for Sand Equivalent Calif. Test 229 Method of Test for Durability Index Calif. Test 301 Method of Test for Resistance “R” Value of Treated and Untreated Bases, Subbases and Basement Soils by the Stabilometer

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL

Page 149: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 11 23 Lionakis No. 014145 Aggregate Base January 19, 2015 Page 2

A. Class 2 aggregate base shall be free of vegetable matter and other deleterious

substances. Coarse aggregate, material contained on the No. 4 sieve, shall consist of material of which 25 percent by weight shall be crushed particles as determined by California Test Method No. 205. Class 2 aggregate base shall conform to one of the following gradings, determined in accordance with California Test Method No. 202:

Percentage Passing Sieves for ¾” maximum

Sieve Sizes

2 inch ----

1 ½ inch ----

1 inch 100

3/4 inch 90-100

No. 4 35-60

No. 30 10-30

No. 200 2-9

B. Class 2 aggregate base shall conform to the following additional requirements:

Tests Test Method No. Calif. Requirements

Resistance (R-Value) 301 78 min.

Sand Equivalent 217 22 min.

Tests Test Method No. Calif. Requirements

Durability Index 229 35 min.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Submit certificate of compliance for approval prior to installation of material.

END OF SECTION

Page 150: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 12 16 January 19, 2015 Asphaltic Concrete Paving Page 1

SECTION 32 12 16

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for providing asphaltic concrete paving as indicated. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork B. Section 32 11 23 – Aggregate Base C. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Marking

1.3 REFERENCES

A. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Specifications

Section 39 Asphalt Concrete

Section 92 Asphalts

Section 93 Liquid Asphalts Section 94 Asphaltic Emulsions

B. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Test Methods

Calif. Test 202 Method of Tests for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates Calif. Test 304 Method of Preparation of Bituminous Mixtures for Testing Calif. Test 366 Method of Test for Stabilometer Value Calif. Test 375 Determining the In Place Density and Relative Compaction of AC Pavement

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BASE COURSE MATERIAL

A. Class 2 Aggregate Base. Percentage composition by weight of aggregate base material shall conform to the 3/4 inch maximum grading when determined by California Test 202.

2.2 TACK COAT (VERTICAL SURFACES)

Page 151: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 12 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Asphaltic Concrete Paving January 19, 2015 Page 2

A. Tack Coat: Diluted SS-1 or SS-1h emulsion or undiluted RS-1 emulsion in conformance with Section 94 or the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

2.3 ASPHALT PAVING MATERIALS

A. Paving Asphalt: All purpose, aged residue, steam refined, PG 64-10 grade, in accordance with Section 92 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

B. Aggregate: Type A, with the grading of the combined aggregate conforming to 1/2 inch

maximum size, medium grading, as specified in Section 39 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

C. Mixing Facilities: Asphalt concrete surfacing material shall be furnished from an

approved commercial asphalt central mixing plant. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor shall submit Certificate of Compliance from manufacturer for approval prior to installation.

END OF SECTION

Page 152: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 14 40 January 19, 2015 Stone Surfacing

Page 1

SECTION 32 14 40

STONE SURFACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The extent of work in this Section includes the provision and installation of the following paving materials, base foundations and appurtenances required for installation.

B. The general extent of work for this Section is shown on the drawings and includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Boulders

2. Pea Gravel Mulch

3. Pea Gravel Paving

4. Pea Gravel Binder

5. Metal Edging

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All manufactured items shall be inspected and approved upon delivery.

B. Protect from damage and intrusion of deleterious materials during delivery, handling, storage, and installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and product samples for review and approval prior to placing order.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Boulders: Shall be blue to green in color, obtained within a 500 mile radius of the project such as Emerald Boulders available from Peninsula Building Materials in Livermore, CA (925) 449-2800.

B. Pea Gravel Mulch: Shall be gray in color, 3/8” diameter, obtained within a 500 mile radius of the project such as 3/8” Pea Gravel available from Peninsula Building Materials in Livermore, CA (925) 449-2800.

Page 153: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 14 40 Lionakis No. 014145 Stone Surfacing January 19, 2015 Page 2

C. Pea Gravel Paving: Shall be gray in color, 3/8” diameter, obtained within a 500 mile radius of the project such as 3/8” Pea Gravel available from Peninsula Building Materials in Livermore, CA (925) 449-2800.

D. Pea Gravel Paving Binder: Shall be a suitable binder for outdoor use with pea gravel such as KBI Flexi-Stone available through K. B. Industries, Inc. in Largo, FL (727) 723-3300.

E. Metal Edging shall be equal or similar to Duraedge Landscape Edging by JD Russell Company, 1/8” thick, 4” wide by 16’ length, hot-rolled, standard flexible carbon steel landscape edging, fabricated in sections with stake pockets stamped, punched or welded to face of sections approximately 30” apart to receive stakes and double stakes at over-lap joints conforming to ASTM A 569. Painted finish to be Sherwin Williams H68GT85 powder coat paint electrostatically applied and oven baked, 1.5 mils thickness, brown in color. Contractor shall use corresponding steel stakes, 14” in length and finished to match edging. Contact JD Russell Company at (800) 888-7425.

END OF SECTION

Page 154: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 16 13 January 19, 2015 Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Walks Page 1

SECTION 32 16 13

CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND WALKS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for providing portland concrete curbs, gutter, sidewalks, driveways, and island paving, as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

ACI 301 Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete

ACI 318/ Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and 381R Commentary

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated,

Welded and Seamless ASTM A615/ Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for A615M Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A663/ Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, A663M Mechanical Properties ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C309 Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C881 Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base bonding Systems for Concrete

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2. 1 MATERIALS

A. Provide Class of Concrete indicated on the Contract Drawings or Construction Drawings.

a. Provide air-entrainment of three percent (± one percent) with admixture conforming to ASTM C260.

Page 155: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 16 13 Lionakis No. 014145 Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Walks January 19, 2015 Page 2

b. Nominal size of large aggregate shall be 1”. c. Minimum total cement content shall be 520 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. d. Minimum strength of concrete shall be 3000 psi.

B. Tie Bars

ASTM A615, Grade 60, of type and size indicated.

C. Dowels

Plain round bars meeting requirements of ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, of ASTM A663/A663M, Grade 80, epoxy-coated bars, furnished with approved snugfitting ASTM A53 galvanized pipe sleeve. Provide sleeve with one end closed.

D. Weep Holes

ASTM A53 galvanized pipe of size indicated.

E. Concrete Curing Compound

ASTM C309, Type 1.

F. Epoxy Adhesive

ASTM C881, Type V for load bearing concrete, Grade and Class as determined by project conditions and requirements.

END OF SECTION

Page 156: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 84 00 January 19, 2015 Planting Irrigation

Page 1

SECTION 32 84 00

PLANTING IRRIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide complete, automatically controlled, spray sprinkler, turf rotor, bubbler and/or drip irrigation system as shown on Drawings.

B. This Section includes but is not limited to: excavating, backfilling, finish grading, piping, valves, sprinklers, specialties, controls, and wiring for automatic control irrigation system.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 22 Sections for water supply from water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Lateral (Circuit) Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, rotors and specialties. Piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Mainline Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.

3. AWG-UF: American Wire Gauge - Underground Feeder.

4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

5. PSIG: Pounds per Square Inch Gauge.

6. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic.

7. SDR: Standard Direct Ratio.

8. V: Volt

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Location of Sprinklers, Rotors and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as

Page 157: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 84 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting Irrigation January 19, 2015 Page 2

signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent, head to head, water coverage of turf and planting areas indicated with uniform coverage and minimum over-spray onto paving and no spray onto buildings or structures.

B. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum working rated pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig.

2. Lateral (Circuit) Piping: 150 psig.

C. Irrigation system to be installed and operated under the rules and regulations of City of Livermore Recycled Water Guidelines (www.cityoflivermore.net public works department, recycled water)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for irrigation components conforming to requirements of Division 1, Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

B. Irrigation installation firm qualifications in accordance with “quality assurance”.

C. Irrigation Wire Diagram: Contractor shall prepare and submit an irrigation wire diagram showing location of control wire, common wire, spare control wire and spare common wire with quantities noted at each run shown on copy of irrigation plan in a legible size and format.

D. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following:

1. Backflow device.

2. Isolation valves.

3. Remote control valves.

4. Valve boxes.

5. Sprinklers, rotors, bubblers, drip emitters.

6. Swing joints.

7. Tree bubbler drain tubes.

8. Main, lateral (circuit) and sleeving pipe.

9. Pipe fittings, primer and cement.

10. Irrigation specialties.

11. Controllers. Include wiring diagrams.

12. Control wires. Include splice kits and conduit.

13. Valve identification tags.

E. Submittal Data: Substitute equipment or material installed without the approval of the Architect will be removed and replaced with specified items at this Contractor’s expense.

Page 158: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 84 00 January 19, 2015 Planting Irrigation

Page 3

F. Coordination Drawings: Maintain orderly set of irrigation drawings and details on project site during installation of irrigation system. Record daily changes showing piping and major system components. Measure and neatly record dimensions for all mainlines, control wire runs, and other pertinent information facilitating maintenance and extension of the irrigation system to within one (1) foot horizontally and six (6) inches vertically. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures. Up to date coordination drawings shall be available for review prior to meetings with the Owner, Architect and Landscape Architect.

G. Field quality-control test reports shall be submitted at substantial completion.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For irrigation systems, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures,” include data for the following:

1. Automatic-control valves.

2. Sprinklers.

3. Controllers.

I. Submittals at Substantial Completion:

1. Irrigation backflow preventer certification.

2. Central control installation certification.

3. Irrigation record drawings.

4. Contractor shall provide the owner with one (1) quick coupler key with hose swivel per each five (5) quick couplers.

5. Backflow preventer testing.

6. Irrigation system leak test to include:

a. Leak test.

b. Operational test.

c. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

d. Coverage test.

7. Irrigation loyalty credits.

J. Record Drawings: Comply with requirements of Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents. Contractor shall create Record Drawings by neatly transferring information recorded on “Coordination Drawings” onto a clean set of irrigation plans indicating dimensions for all mainlines, control wire runs, and other pertinent information facilitating maintenance and extension of the irrigation system to within one (1) foot horizontally and six (6) inches vertically. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping, system components, adjacent utilities, and proximate structures.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

Page 159: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 84 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting Irrigation January 19, 2015 Page 4

1. Experience: The irrigation installation firm shall have contracted for and successfully completed construction of a minimum of five (5) California public school district construction projects, approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA), within the past five (5) years of similar size, complexity, budget and scope.

2. Licensure: The irrigation installation firm shall hold a current, active C27 “Landscaping Contractor” license classification by the California State License Board that has been consistently active for at least five (5) years and that has not been suspended or revoked.

3. Supervision: The irrigation installation firm shall have a qualified and experienced irrigation technician on site during irrigation installation.

4. Drip Irrigation: The irrigation installation firm shall have contracted for and successfully complete construction of a minimum of five (5) drip irrigation installations within the past five (5) years of similar size and complexity.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground irrigation system as a complete unit. Each type component produced by a single acceptable manufacturer, including heads, valves, controls and accessories.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Pipe crossings beneath fire Lanes: Comply with NFPA 24-10, Depth of Cover at Fire Access Lanes.

E. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination”.

F. All work and materials shall be in strict accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the State Fire Marshall, Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, National Electrical Code, California Administrative Code, part 4, Title 24, “Basic Mechanical Regulations” and other applicable state or local laws or ordinances. Nothing in these drawings or specifications is to be construed as permitting work which does not conform to the codes or regulations.

G. Contractor shall provide all licenses, fees and other charges required for completion of the work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

Page 160: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 84 00 January 19, 2015 Planting Irrigation

Page 5

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner’s Representative's written permission.

B. Interruption of Existing Irrigation Service: Do not interrupt existing to remain irrigation service. Prior to demolition work and prior to beginning irrigation work, review project site and meet with Owner Representative to review locations and connections of existing to remain irrigation system. Coordinate with General Contractor to ensure existing irrigation remains in place and operable through the duration of construction. In the event existing irrigation is shut off or damaged during construction, contractor shall provide temporary connections or modifications to continue water service to existing to remain planting material or turf to maintain in a healthy growing condition throughout construction. In the event water service is not available, contractor shall apply water through manual delivery means as necessary. Obtain approval from Owner’s Representation two days in advance of any planned disruptions in water service.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Use new materials of brands shown or drawings, specified herein or approved equal.

B. Use existing materials if shown on drawings.

C. Substitution of sprinklers, rotors, drip, valves and controllers will be allowed with matching material, flow rates, precipitation rates, friction losses, and sizing equal to the brand and model specified unless the equipment is a District Standard.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type S or E, Grade A or B, galvanized with threaded ends.

1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

Page 161: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 84 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting Irrigation January 19, 2015 Page 6

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends.

3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern.

4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

5. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125, galvanized.

B. Mainline Piping:

1. Class 315 purple reclaimed water PVC pipe, ASTM D 1785, NSF approved (2” and larger)

2. Schedule 40 purple reclaimed water PVC pipe, ASTM D 2466, NSF approved (1.5” and smaller).

3. Fittings to be Harco epoxy coated deep bell ductile iron with joint restraints (2” and larger).

4. Fittings to be schedule 80 PVC (1.5” and smaller).

B. Lateral Line Piping:

1. Schedule 40 purple reclaimed water PVC pipe, ASTM D 2466, NSF approved.

2. Fittings to be schedule 80 PVC.

C. Sleeves:

1. For irrigation piping, use schedule 40 purple PVC pipe, NSF approved, 3” minimum in size for irrigation piping.

2. For irrigation wiring, use schedule 40 PVC pipe, gray electrical conduit, UL listed, NEMA TC-6, ANSI/UL651, ASTM F512, for outdoor, direct bury applications, PVC, 3” minimum size.

2.3 ISOLATION VALVES: As indicated on the drawings. Install using Harco Valve to Fitting Restraint system. Deliver one (1) operating key for every five (5) gate valves to grounds department.

2.4 QUICK-COUPLERS: As indicated on the drawings.

2.5 VALVE BOXES: In paved areas, use Christy concrete utility box, size as required, with Christy #3800 recycled water box name plate. In planting areas, use Carson plastic underground enclosure with locking lid, bolt and washer, size as required, color to be purple. Valve boxes to be rectangular for remote control valves and ball or gate valves and round for quick coupling valves. Lids shall be labeled “Recycled Water” or “Recycled”.

2.6 PULL BOXES AND SPLICE BOXES: In paved areas, use Christy concrete utility box, size as required. In planting areas, use Carson plastic underground enclosure with locking lid, bolt and washer, size as required, color to be green in turf areas and black in planting areas. Box lid to be labeled “IRRIGATION”.

2.7 SPRINKLERS: As indicated on the drawings.

Page 162: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 84 00 January 19, 2015 Planting Irrigation

Page 7

2.8 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES: As indicated on the drawings.

2.9 AUTOMATIC-CONTROL SYSTEM: As indicated on the drawings and shall be posted with a purple recycled water sticker. The message on the sticker shall be printed in both English and Spanish in accordance with City of Livermore requirements.

2.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE: As indicated on the drawings.

2.11 24 VOLT WIRING: All 24 V line to be #14-1 AWG-UF. Control wire insulation to be red in color and spare wire to be yellow in color. 24 V common wire to be #12-1 AWG-UF, insulation to be white in color and spare common insulation shall be black in color.

2.12 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT: Shall be Schedule 40 PVC conduit, 3” minimum in size.

2.13 CONNECTORS: Shall be Splice-Kote, Dura Seal heat shrink waterproof nylon wire connectors, or 3M “DBY” connectors.

2.14 TRACER WIRE: Tracer Wire: #8 solid Bare Copper Wire.

2.15 MARKING TAPE: Marking tape shall be purple, with black lettering stating “Caution: Recycled Water – Do Not Drink.”

2.16 ADHESIVE TAPE: Tape for wrapping recycled water piping shall be purple, with black lettering stating “Caution: Recycled Water – Do Not Drink.”

2.17 VALVE IDENTIFICATION TAGS: Shall be plastic yellow in color for potable water systems and purple in color for recycled water systems with 1 1/8” stamped black letters indicating controller/station number.

2.18 SAND BACKFILL: Shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, existing of native material, or combinations thereof, and shall conform to ASTM C-40 Organic Impurities, ASTM D-2419 Sand Equivalent and a pH value between 4.5 and 9.

2.19 RECYCLED WATER SIGNAGE: Sign shall measure no less than 8” by 8” with white type against a purple background.

END OF SECTION

Page 163: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015
Page 164: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 90 00 January 19, 2015 Sodding

Page 1

SECTION 32 90 00

SODDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Sod area and soil preparation.

2. Installation of sod.

3. Installation of edgings.

4. Weed and/or rodent control.

5. Maintenance.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.

3. Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Import Topsoil: Shall be obtained from a local source and coming from a site with similar soil characteristics as the project site. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural loam surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones and rocks and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending nutrients, minerals, soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce surface planting soil capable of sustaining plant growth.

D. On-site Topsoil: Naturally occurring, on-site, surface soil, usually occurring in the top four (4) to twelve (12) inches of original, undisturbed surface soil containing organic material, necessary nutrients and minerals to sustain plant growth.

E. Planting Soil: On-site topsoil, import topsoil or manufactured topsoil.

F. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath topsoil.

Page 165: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 90 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Sodding January 19, 2015 Page 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product and Material Data: For each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for landscape products conforming to requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures to include, but not be limited to:

1. Analysis of proposed soil amending materials by Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal, made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

2. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

a. Soil conditioner (1/2 c.f. each).

3. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod, identifying source, including name and telephone number of supplier.

4. Material Test Reports: For on-site topsoil, import topsoil and/or manufactured soil proposed for use on this project.

5. Planting soil amendments as recommended by Soil and Plant Laboratory.

B. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, signed by product manufacturer shall be delivered to Owner’s Representative upon delivery.

C. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer prior to performing work.

D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for turf installation.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Experience: The turf installation firm shall have contracted for and successfully completed construction of a minimum of five (5) California public school district construction projects, approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA), within the past five (5) years of similar size, complexity, budget and scope

2. Licensure: The turf installation firm shall hold a current, active C27 “Landscaping Contractor” license classification by the California State License Board that has been consistently active for at least five (5) years and that has not been suspended or revoked.

3. Supervision: The turf installation firm shall have a qualified and experienced turf technician on site during turf installation.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Testing lab shall be Soil and Plant Laboratory located in San Jose (408) 727-0330 or Anaheim (714) 282-8777, or approved equal independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity (CEC)

Page 166: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 90 00 January 19, 2015 Sodding

Page 3

or total exchangeable cations (TEC); sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; soluable salts, boron, mineral and plant-nutrient content of planting soil.

1. Report suitability of planting soil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory planting soil.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”

E. Protect all lawn areas from damage or trespass by installing temporary barriers or protective fencing during construction and maintenance. Barrier and/or fencing material and installation method shall be approved by Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in Turfgrass Producers Internation "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding."

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Planting Restrictions: Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

1.8 LAWN MAINTENANCE

A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Sodded Lawns: Maintenance period shall be a minimum of sixty (60) days from date of Owner’s Representative written approval of Substantial Completion and when there are no visible joints, roots are thoroughly knit to the soil and sod appears to be uniformly healthy and green in color.

B. Maintain and establish lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and spraying for insects and disease and other operations. Roll, re-grade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth lawn. Implement pest management as necessary to controls pests, including gophers.

1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch. Anchor as required to prevent displacement.

C. Watering: Provide and/or maintain temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment as necessary to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of mulch.

2. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

Page 167: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 90 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Sodding January 19, 2015 Page 4

D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than one-third (1/3) of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow and edge before turf reaches three (3) inches high.

2. Cut at maximum of two (2) inches high.

3. Remove all clippings.

E. Lawn Post-fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to lawn area.

F. Maintain protective barriers in place, erect and secure and clear of lawn edges to allow for uniform growth and for trimming and so as not to block irrigation spray pattern.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with Turfgrass Producers International "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in its "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. Not less than 2 years old, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses and machine cut rolls to pad thickness of 5/8 inch, rolled, 4’ wide and 90’ length.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 90 percent germination, not less than 95 percent pure seed, and free of weed seed:

1. Delta Bluegrass (800-637-8873, www.deltabluegrass.com) 90/10 Tall Fescue mixture or equal.

a. 90 percent tall fescue blend.

b. 10 percent Kentucky bluegrass blend.

C. Delivery, Storage and Handling: Sod shall be harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 24 hours. Sod shall be kept moist, fresh and protected at all times.

2.2 PLANTING SOIL

A. Prior to placing bid, Contractor to coordinate with General Contractor, Owner, Demolition and/or Grading Contractors and verify quantity and source of planting soil for turf planting areas. Identify Contractor responsible for stockpiling on-site topsoil and/or acquiring import planting soil and installing a minimum of six (6) inches of planting soil in turf planting areas and rough grading in accordance with these specifications, details, notes, grading and drainage plans.

B. Coordinate with General Contractor, Owner, Demolition and/or Grading Contractors for removal and replacement of any lime treated soils and replacement with planting soil prior to planting turf to depth required to remove lime treatment.

Page 168: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 90 00 January 19, 2015 Sodding

Page 5

C. On-site topsoil: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce planting soil by submitting a sample to a soil testing laboratory. Acceptable on-site topsoil shall be ASTM D 5268, pH range of 6.0 to 7.0, representative of productive soils in the vicinity, a range of 4 to 20 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Sodium absorption rate (SAR) shall not exceed 5.0, conductivity of the saturation extract solution shall not exceed 3.0, and boron concentration in the saturation shall not exceed 1.0 ppm.

D. Import Topsoil: Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site, local sources, when quantities of on-site topsoil are insufficient. Do not obtain topsoil from bogs or marshes. If soil is obtained from agricultural land, Contractor shall submit proof soil is nematode free. Import topsoil shall meet the following requirements:

1. USDA Classification of fraction passing 2.0 mm sieve: sandy loam, sandy clay loam or loam.

2. Class Particle size range maximum, % minimum, %

Coarse Sand 0.5 – 2.0 mm 15 0 Silt .002-.05 mm 30 10 Clay <.002 mm 25 10 Other Classes

Gravel 2-13 mm 15 0 Rock ½-1 inch 5% by volume with none >1 inch Organic 15 0

3. Chemistry – Suitability Considerations

Salinity: Saturation Extract Conductivity (ECe) Less than 3.0 dS/m @ 25 degrees C. Sodium: Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) Less than 1.00 ppm Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration Less than 6 Reaction: pH of Saturated Paste: 5.5 – 7.5 without high lime content.

4. Soil to contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium and magnesium to support normal plant growth. In the event of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required materials prior to planting.

5. Soil testing: Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s representative for approval, certification from an agricultural soils testing laboratory that the import topsoil provided conforms to the specifications prior to delivery of import or placement of on-site topsoil. Soil testing shall have been performed on import topsoil source within the previous year.

E. Soil testing: Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s representative for approval, certification from an agricultural soils testing laboratory that the import/on-site topsoil provided conforms to the specifications prior to delivery of import or placement on on-site topsoil.

Page 169: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 90 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Sodding January 19, 2015 Page 6

2.3 FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Contractor shall collect and submit two samples of proposed planting soil, representative of the top eight (8) inches of planting soil, to a locally known soil testing laboratory for analysis and amendment recommendations. Soil samples shall be taken from proposed planting areas or topsoil source. Sample shall be taken to a depth of 8 inches. Contractor shall amend per soil testing laboratory recommendations. Soil amendments in this specification are provided for bidding purposes only.

B. Fertilizers: All fertilizers shall be of an approved brand with a guaranteed chemical analysis as required by USDA regulations and shall be dry and (except for plant tabs) free flowing.

C. Soil Preparation: As specified in soil laboratory recommendation. The following materials and quantities are given for bidding purposes only. Contractor shall amend soil using products, quantities and methods specified by Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal.

1. 6-20-20 granular fertilizer.

2. Soil sulfur.

D. Soil Conditioner: 0-1/4 inch nitrogen-fortified organic amendment contributing at least 270 pounds of organic matter per cubic yard.

E. Planting Tablets: 21 gram controlled release fertilizer supplying nitrogen for up to 1 ½ years and 20-10-5 content.

2.4 HERBICIDES

A. All herbicides shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to use.

B. Contractor shall contact Owner’s Representative prior to application of herbicides for Owner’s policies, rules and regulations pertaining to herbicide application.

C. Selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application to remove broad-leaf weeds from existing turf.

D. Non-selective Herbicides: EPA registered and approved, of type recommended by manufacturer for application to remove herbacious vegetation in areas indicated.

2.5 WATER

A. Water shall be suitable for irrigation and free from ingredients harmful to sodded areas.

2.6 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS/HEADERBOARD

A. Wood Strip Edging: Of sizes shown, and as follows:

1. Wood Material: Construction heart redwood, 2 by 6 in size, length as required.

2. Stakes: Construction grade, rough sawn, wood, 2 by 2 by 16 inches long in nominal size, with galvanized, wood, screws for anchoring edging to wood strip edging.

END OF SECTION

Page 170: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 91 14 January 19, 2015 Bioretention Soil Page 1

SECTION 32 91 14

BIORETENTION SOIL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for furnishing, placing, and compacting bioretention soils as indicated. Bioretention soil shall achieve a long-term, in-place infiltration rate of at least 5 inches per hour. Bioretention soil shall also support vigorous plant growth.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork 2. Section 32 80 00 – Irrigation 3. Section 32 91 13 – Soil Preparation and Finish Grading 4. Section 32 92 00 – Lawns and Grasses 5. Section 32 93 00 – Trees, Shrubs, Ornamental Grasses and Ground Covers 6. Section 32 94 00 – Planting Accessories 7. Section 32 97 00 – Landscape Maintenance 8. Section 33 40 50 – Landscape Drainage

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM D422 – Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D1557 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort ASTM D2434 – Standard Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils

(Constant Head) ASTM D5268 – Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping

Purposes

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SAND FOR BIORETENTION SOIL

A. General.

Page 171: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 91 14 Lionakis No. 014145 Bioretention Soil January 19, 2015 Page 2

1. Sand shall be free of wood, waste, coating such as clay, stone dust, carbonate,

etc., or any other deleterious material. All aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve size shall be non-plastic.

B. Sand for Bioretention Soil Texture.

1. Sand for Bioretention Soils shall be analyzed by an accredited lab using #200,

#100, #40, #30, #16, #8, #4, and 3/8 inch sieves (ASTM D 422 or as approved by University), and meet the following gradation:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing (by weight)

Min Max 3/8 Inch 100 100 No. 4 90 100 No. 8 70 100 No. 16 40 95 No. 30 15 70 No. 40 5 55 No. 100 0 15 No. 200 0 5

Note all sands complying with ASTM C33 for fine aggregate comply with the above gradation requirements.

2.2 TOPSOIL FOR BIORETENTION SOIL

A. General

Topsoil shall be free of wood, waste, or any other deleterious material.

B. Topsoil for Bioretention Soil Texture

The overall topsoil texture shall be loamy sand as analyzed by an accredited laboratory. The overall dry weight percentages shall be 60-90% sand, with less than 20% passing than the #200 sieve and less than 5% clay of the total weight with no gravel.

2.3 COMPOSTED MATERIAL

Compost shall be a well decomposed, stable, weed free organic matter source meeting the standards developed by the US Composting Council (USCC). The product shall be certified through the USCC Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program (a compost testing and information disclosure program).

A. Compost Quality Analysis Before delivery of the soil, the Contractor shall submit a copy

of lab analysis performed by a laboratory that is enrolled in the US Composting Council’s Compost Analysis Proficiency (CAP) program and using approved Test Methods for the Evaluation of Composting and Compost (TMECC). The lab report shall verify:

Page 172: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 91 14 January 19, 2015 Bioretention Soil Page 3

1. Feedstock Materials shall be specified and include one or more of the following: landscape/yard trimmings, grass clippings, food scraps, and agricultural crop residues.

2. Organic Matter Content: 35% - 75% by dry wt. 3. Carbon and Nitrogen Ratio: C:N < 25:1. 4. Maturity/Stability: shall have a dark brown color and a soil-like odor. Compost

exhibiting a sour or putrid smell, containing recognizable grass or leaves, or is hot (120F) upon delivery or rewetting is not acceptable. In addition, any one of the following is required to indicate stability:

a. Oxygen Test < 1.3 O2 /unit TS /hr b. Specific oxy. Test < 1.5 O2 / unit BVS c. Respiration test < 8 C / unit VS / day d. Dewar test < 20 Temp. rise (°C) e. Solvita® > 5 Index value

5. Toxicity: any one of the following measures is sufficient to indicate non-toxicity.

a. NH4- : NO3-N < 3 b. Ammonium < 500 ppm, dry basis c. Seed Germination > 80 % of control d. Plant Trials > 80% of control e. Solvita® > 5 Index value

6. Nutrient Content: provide analysis detailing nutrient content including N-P-K, Ca,

Na, Mg, S, and B.

a. Total Nitrogen content 0.9% or above preferred. b. Boron: Total shall be <80 ppm; Soluble shall be <2.5 ppm

7. Salinity: Must be reported; < 6.0 mmhos/cm 8. pH shall be between 6.5 and 8. May vary with plant species.

B. Particle size: 95% passing a 1/2” screen C. Bulk density: shall be between 500 and 1100 dry lbs/cubic yard D. Moisture Content shall be between 30% - 55% of dry solids E. Inerts: compost shall be relatively free of inert ingredients, including glass, plastic and

paper, < 1 % by weight or volume

F. Weed seed/pathogen destruction: provide proof of process to further reduce pathogens (PFRP). For example, turned windrows must reach min. 55C for 15 days with at least 5 turnings during that period.

G. Select Pathogens: Salmonella <3 MPN/4grams of TS, or Coliform Bacteria <10000

MPN/gram

Page 173: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 91 14 Lionakis No. 014145 Bioretention Soil January 19, 2015 Page 4

H. Trace Contaminants Metals (Lead, Mercury, Etc.) Product must meet US EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations

I. Compost Testing. The Contractor will test all compost products within 120 calendar

days prior to application. Samples will be taken using the STA sample collection protocol. (The sample collection protocol can be obtained from the U.S. Composting Council, 4250 Veterans Memorial Highway, Suite 275, Holbrook, NY 11741 Phone: 631-737-4931, www.compostingcouncil.org). The sample shall be sent to an independent STA Program approved lab. The Contractor will pay for the test.

END OF SECTION

Page 174: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 96 00 January 19, 2015 Planting

Page 1

SECTION 32 96 00

PLANTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Trees.

2. Shrubs.

3. Ground cover.

4. Vines.

5. Edgings.

6. Planters.

7. Bio-retention Basin.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Specification section “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection” for protection and preservation of existing trees.

2. Specification section “Earthwork” for excavation, filling and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.

3. Specification section “Storm Drainage” for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Exterior plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of tree or shrub required, or as indicated; wrapped, tied, rigidly supported, and drum-laced as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

B. Bare-Root Stock: Exterior plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind and size of exterior plant required.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

Page 175: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 96 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting January 19, 2015 Page 2

E. Import Topsoil: Shall be obtained from a local source and coming from a site with similar soil characteristics as the project site. Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural loam surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter and free of roots, stumps, stones and rocks and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth.

F. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

G. On-site Topsoil: Naturally occurring, on-site, surface soil, usually occurring in the top four (4) to twelve (12) inches of original, undisturbed surface soil containing organic material, necessary nutrients and minerals to sustain plant growth.

H. Planting Soil: On-site topsoil, import topsoil or manufactured topsoil.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.

J. Plant material: Exterior plants contained within the planting plan legend in categories of Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Perennials, Annuals and/or Ground Covers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product, Material Data and/or Samples: For each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for landscape products conforming to requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures to include, but not be limited to:

1. Samples of the following:

a. Bark mulch top dressing (1/2 c.f. each)

b. Edging materials and accessories, of manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected.

2. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

3. Material Test Reports: For on-site topsoil, import topsoil and/or manufactured soil proposed for use on this project.

4. Planting soil amendments as recommended by Soil and Plant Laboratory.

5. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer in compliance with “Quality Assurance”.

B. Plant Materials List: Submit confirmation from supplier 30 days prior to planting that all plant material has been ordered.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, signed by product manufacturer shall be delivered to Owner’s Representative upon delivery.

D. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer prior to performing work.

E. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

Page 176: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 96 00 January 19, 2015 Planting

Page 3

1. Experience: The landscape installation firm shall have contracted for and successfully completed construction of a minimum of five (5) California public school district construction projects, approved by the Division of the State Architect (DSA), within the past five (5) years of similar size, complexity, budget and scope

2. Licensure: The landscape installation firm shall hold a current, active C27 “Landscaping Contractor” license classification by the California State License Board that has been consistently active for at least five (5) years and that has not been suspended or revoked.

3. Supervision: The landscape installation firm shall have a qualified and experienced landscape technician on site during landscape installation.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Testing lab shall be Soil and Plant Laboratory located in San Jose (408) 727-0330 or Anaheim (714) 282-8777, or approved equal independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity (CEC) or total exchangeable cations (TEC); sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; soluable salts, boron, mineral and plant-nutrient content of planting soil.

1. Report suitability of planting soil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory planting soil.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."

1. Selection of exterior plants purchased under allowances will be made by Owner’s Representative, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting.

E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.

F. Observation: Owner’s Representative may observe trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

1. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials 30 days in advance of delivery to site.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with General Contractor and/or Owner’s Representative to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

Page 177: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 96 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting January 19, 2015 Page 4

H. Protect all planting areas from trespass or damage by installing temporary barriers or protective fencing during construction and maintenance. Barrier and/or fencing material and installation method shall be approved by Owner’s Representative prior to installation.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Notify Owner’s Representative fourteen (14) days prior to anticipated plant material delivery to schedule review of plant material prior to installation.

B. Deliver exterior ball and burlap plants freshly dug. Keep root system moist until planting.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Owner’s Representative. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball.

E. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Heel-in bare-root stock. Soak roots in water for two hours if dried out.

2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material.

3. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

4. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Prior to placing topsoil, Contractor shall collect and submit soil samples representative of on-site topsoil and/or import topsoil proposed for use in all planting and lawn areas to a Soil-Testing Laboratory for analysis and soil amending recommendations. Submit test results analysis and recommendations to architect for review and approval prior to beginning work.

B. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when weather conditions permit.

D. Coordination with Lawns: Plant trees and shrubs after finish grades are established and before planting lawns, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner’s Representative.

1. When planting trees and shrubs after lawns, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

E. Contractor shall protect new plantings and/or delay planting in event of forecasted freezing temperatures.

Page 178: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 96 00 January 19, 2015 Planting

Page 5

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner or users, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

1. Warranty Period for Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Lawns and Ground Covers: One year from date of Final Completion.

2. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

3. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

4. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

1.9 MAINTENANCE

A. Trees, Shrubs and Vines: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting basins, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

1. Maintenance Period: Sixty (60) days from date of Owner’s Representative”s written approval of Substantial Completion.

B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep ground cover plants free of insects and disease.

1. Maintenance Period: Sixty (60) days from date of Owner’s Representative’s written approval of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE, SHRUB AND VINE MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Owner’s Representative, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

D. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.

Page 179: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 96 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting January 19, 2015 Page 6

2.2 SINGLE-TRUNK AND MULTI-TRUNK TREES

A. Trees: Single-trunk or multi-trunk trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.

1. Provide balled and burlapped, bare-root or container grown trees as specified on the Planting Plan Legend.

2. Branching Height: typical of tree species and container size, single trunk unless specified as multi-trunk on Planting Plan Legend. Select branching height in accordance with planting location. Low branching trees shall not be planted in conflict with pathways, driveways and/or structures.

3. Single-stem trees shall have straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required.

4. Multi-stem trees shall branch naturally according to species and type, with relationship of caliper, height, and branching according to ANSI Z60.1.

2.3 GROUND COVER PLANTS

A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.

2.4 PLANTS

A. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud and bloom.

B. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed, remove dead flowers.

2.5 TOPSOIL

A. Prior to placing bid, Contractor to coordinate with General Contractor, Owner, Demolition and/or Grading Contractors and verify quantity and source of planting soil for all planting areas. Identify Contractor responsible for stockpiling on-site topsoil and/or acquiring import planting soil and installing a minimum of six (6) inches of planting soil in all landscape planting areas and any raised planters and rough grading in accordance with these specifications, details, notes, grading and drainage plans.

B. Coordinate with General Contractor, Owner, Demolition and/or Grading Contractors for removal and replacement of lime treated soils and replacement with planting soil prior to planting to depth required to remove lime treatment. In event trees are planted in lime treated soils, trees shall have a minimum six (6) inch layer of planting soil below their rootball to provide a suitable substrate to root into for establishment.

C. On-site topsoil: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce planting soil by submitting a sample to a soil testing laboratory. Acceptable on-site topsoil shall be ASTM D 5268, pH range of 6.0 to 7.0, representative of productive soils in the vicinity, a range of 4 to 20 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Sodium absorption rate (SAR) shall not exceed 5.0, conductivity of the saturation extract solution shall not exceed 3.0, and boron concentration in the saturation shall not exceed 1.0 ppm.

Page 180: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 96 00 January 19, 2015 Planting

Page 7

D. Import Topsoil: Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site, local sources, when quantities of on-site topsoil are insufficient. Do not obtain topsoil from bogs or marshes. If soil is obtained from agricultural land, Contractor shall submit proof soil is nematode free. Import topsoil shall meet the following requirements:

1. USDA Classification of fraction passing 2.0 mm sieve: sandy loam, sandy clay loam or loam.

2. Class Particle size range maximum, % minimum, %

Coarse Sand 0.5 – 2.0 mm 15 0

Silt .002-.05 mm 30 10

Clay <.002 mm 25 10

Other Classes

Gravel 2-13 mm 15 0

Rock ½-1 inch 5% by volume with none >1 inch

Organic 15 0

3. Chemistry – Suitability Considerations

Salinity: Saturation Extract Conductivity (ECe)

Less than 3.0 dS/m @ 25 degrees C.

Sodium: Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR)

Less than 1.00 ppm

Boron: Saturation Extract Concentration

Less than 6

Reaction: pH of Saturated Paste: 5.5 – 7.5 without high lime content.

4. Soil to contain sufficient quantities of available nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, calcium and magnesium to support normal plant growth. In the event of nutrient inadequacies, provisions shall be made to add required materials prior to planting.

5. Soil testing: Contractor shall submit to the Owner’s representative for approval, certification from an agricultural soils testing laboratory that the import topsoil provided conforms to the specifications prior to delivery of import or placement of on-site topsoil. Soil testing shall have been performed on import topsoil source within the previous year.

2.6 BIO-RETENTION BASIN

A. Refer to civil drawings for construction of bio-retention basin swales.

B. Line bio-retention basin swale with Lenox Blend soil mixture available from LH Voss Materials, Inc. (or approved equal) 2445 Del Vista Monte, Concord, CA 94520, www.lhvoss.com, (800) 660-8677, Rob Hawkins x 108, Butch Voss x 109. Depth shall be a minimum of 18” unless specified otherwise within plans and/or details.

Page 181: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 96 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting January 19, 2015 Page 8

2.7 FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Contractor shall collect and submit two samples of proposed planting soil, representative of the top eight (8) inches of planting soil, to a locally known soil testing laboratory for analysis and amendment recommendations. Soil samples shall be taken from proposed planting areas or topsoil source. Sample shall be taken to a depth of 8 inches. Contractor shall amend per soil testing laboratory recommendations. Soil amendments in this specification are provided for bidding purposes only.

B. If import topsoil is proposed, import topsoil sample shall be submitted to a locally known soil testing laboratory, Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal, for analysis, amendment recommendations and installation recommendations.

C. Contractor shall provide Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal, the following information when submitting soil for analysis:

1. Project type (public school, commercial building, etc.).

2. Anticipated maintenance (regular, low, none, etc.).

3. Irrigation water source (potable or recycled).

4. Proposed plant material type such as California native plants.

5. Copy of this specification.

D. Fertilizers: All fertilizers shall be of an approved brand with a guaranteed chemical analysis as required by USDA regulations and shall be dry and (except for plant tabs) free flowing.

E. Soil Preparation: The following materials and quantities are given for bidding purposes only and Contractor shall amend planting soil using products, quantities and methods specified by Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal.

1. Ammonium sulfate (21-0-0)

2. Triple superphosphate (0-45-0)

3. Agricultural gypsum

F. Soil Conditioner: 0-1/4 inch nitrogen-fortified organic amendment contributing at least 270 pounds of organic matter per cubic yard. Greenwaste compost is acceptable if recommended by Soil and Plant Laboratory, or approved equal. Compost shall be obtained from a supplier participating in the Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program of the U.S. Composting Council.

C. Planting Tablets: 21 gram controlled release fertilizer supplying nitrogen for up to 1 ½ years and 20-10-5 content.

D. Backfill Mix: Shall be a mixture of on-site, manufactured or import planting soil, soil conditioner and fertilizer. For bidding purposes, backfill mix shall include 2/3 planting soil and 1/3 soil conditioner with 6-20-20 granular fertilizer, quantity per manufacturer, according to container or root stock size, mixed thoroughly.

2.8 MULCHES

A. Organic Mulch for non-bio-retention planting areas: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of organic bark from Republic Services (contact Glenn Bohling at (408) 687-1928 or [email protected]) Pro-Chip decorative mulch, Browning Ferris Industries, Newby Island Recyclery, Milpitas,

Page 182: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 32 96 00 January 19, 2015 Planting

Page 9

CA (408) 945-2836. Color to be mahogany. Submit sample to Owners Representative’s for review and approval.

B. Organic Mulch for Bio-retention basin swales: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of organic shredded cedar bark from Sun Gro Horticulture, (800) 222-2551, or equal. Submit sample to Owner’s Representative for review and approval.

2.9 WEED CONTROL

A. Weed control shall consist of biodegradable, paper product, permeable weed barrier layer. Paper products may consist of two (2) to three (3) layers of recycled content builder’s paper, four (4) to (6) layers of newspaper print, or one (1) layer of cardboard.

2.10 STAKES AND GUYS

A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure-preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, two (2) inches in diameter by length required, and pointed at one end.

B. Guy and Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, 2-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.

C. Guy Cable: 5-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts.

D. Tree Ties: Z-Strap tree ties, or equal, made of one (1) inch wide black rubber with pre-punched nail holes, a tensile strength of 400 psi, a breaking strength of 75 pounds per inch of width and resistant to ozone deterioration. Contact Sullivan & Mann Lumber Company, Inc. (800) 847-6562.

E. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.

2.11 LANDSCAPE EDGING/HEADERBOARD

A. Wood Edging/Headerboard shall be construction heart redwood in dimensions shown in Drawings.

B. Stakes shall be construction heart redwood 1 by 2 by 16 inches.

C. Splice plate shall be construction heart redwood, 1 by 6 by 24 inches in nominal size and secured with galvanized nails.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Tree Trunk Guard: nine (9) inch high by four (4) inch diameter plastic, corrugated tube, Arbor Guard + or equal.

B. Tree Root Barriers: 18” high by 24” wide, interlocking panels of not less than 0.080” (2.032 mm) thickness, black in color, at least 50% recycled material, injection molded plastic product for linear applications with ultra-violet inhibitors with anti-lift ground lock tabs, vertical root deflecting ribs and double top edge consisting of two parallel, horizontal ribs on the top.

Page 183: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

32 96 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Planting January 19, 2015 Page 10

C. Jute Netting: Shall be natural fiber netting appropriate for erosion control on steep slopes with approximate mesh size 3/5 by 4/5 applied from rolls. Secure with matching staples.

END OF SECTION

Page 184: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

DIVISION 33 SECTIONS

Page 185: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 05 16 January 19, 2015 Utility Structures Page 1

SECTION 33 05 16

UTILITY STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for the furnishing and installing of cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete structures for utilities as indicated.

B. The work includes: Catch basins, curb and gutter inlets, manholes, valve boxes,

handholes, pull boxes, vaults, covers and the related cast iron, aluminum and steel products required for gratings, covers, and manhole steps and ladders, channel inserts, pulling eyes, and electrical grounding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork B. Section 31 23 19 - De-watering C. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A36/ Specification for Carbon Structural Steel A36M

ASTM A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A108 Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard

Quality ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc Coated (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware ASTM A536 Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM B3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B26/ Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings B26M ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates

Page 186: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 05 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Utility Structures January 19, 2015 Page 2

ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C260 Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C478 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C618 Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete

ASTM C789 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for

Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers

ASTM C850 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 Feet of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings

ASTM C858 Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C891 Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast

Concrete Utility Structures ASTM F 436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

B. California Uniform Plumbing Code - Latest Edition C. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Drawings - Latest Edition D. City of Ukiah Standard Plans and Specifications – Latest Edition

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. Materials

1. Portland Cement

ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali.

2. Admixtures

a. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. Provide six percent air entrainment, plus or minus one percent.

b. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. Provide pozzolan of 10 percent by

weight of the cement content.

Page 187: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 05 16 January 19, 2015 Utility Structures Page 3

3. Aggregates

ASTM C33, fine aggregate and Size No. 67 (3/4 inch maximum size) coarse aggregate.

B. Mix Design

Incorporate the following requirements:

1. Concrete Strength: Class 4000 minimum 2. Maximum water-cement plus pozzolan ratio: 0.45. 3. Maximum slump: Four inches.

2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES

A. General

The Contractor may provide precast concrete structures which conform to the general configuration, capacities, and inverts indicated.

B. Materials

Provide fine and coarse aggregates conforming to ASTM C33, in size commensurate with structure and reinforcement clearances.

C. Portland Cement Concrete

Class 4000 minimum Concrete may be polymer or latex modified to achieve higher strengths and denser concrete. Concrete shall not deteriorate from chemical attack of sanitary waste.

D. Precast Covers

Precast covers shall have the utility identification, such as “PG&E Gas Valve,” stamped into the cover.

E. Quality Control

1. Quality Assurance and Control: The Engineer shall perform such inspections

and tests as required to verify compliance with these Specifications. 2. Furnish samples of materials and their handling as needed by the Engineer for

analyses of materials. 2.3 METAL COVERS, GRATES, AND INLETS

A. Ferrous Castings

1. Metal used in manufacture of castings shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B for Gray Iron, or ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 for Ductile Iron.

Page 188: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 05 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Utility Structures January 19, 2015 Page 4

2. Castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, shrinkage, distortion or

other defects. Castings shall be smooth and cleaned by shot blasting. 3. Minimum tensile strength shall be 35,000 psi. 4. Castings shall be manufactured true to pattern; component parts shall fit together

in a satisfactory manner. Round frames and covers shall have continuously machined bearing surfaces to prevent rocking and rattling. Covers shall be of a type that overlaps box edges.

5. Where castings will be subjected to loads of H20 or greater, as indicated, provide

ductile iron castings.

B. Aluminum Castings

Where required to reduce weights of larger covers for ease of handling, such covers may be manufactured of aluminum castings conforming to ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy No. 713.0. Minimum tensile strength shall be 32,000 psi. All covers with an opening four feet or larger shall be Bilco Type JAL-H20 or equivalent and shall have slip resistant surface (course) that meets ADA, NFPA, ASTM D-2047, F-1679 and C-1028. Coatings shall be Traxplate by Jensen or equivalent.

C. Manhole Covers

Provide cast, manufactured manhole covers and frames with heavy duty solid cover (lid) or vented cover (lid) as indicated. Covers shall be embossed or engraved with nonslip diamond or square cross-hatched pattern. Provide covers with embossed or engraved word identification, as indicated or appropriate, for the enclosed or underground utility.

D. Grates

Cast Ferrous Grates: Grates for area drains and catch basins shall be heavy duty, bicycle safe inlet grates and frames of size and configuration indicated. Grates in roadways and parking areas shall withstand H20 loadings when proof-tested in accordance with Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Manual, Section 3.

E. Curb and Gutter Inlets

Provide cast, manufactured curb inlet frame, grate, and curb box of size and configuration indicated. Curb and gutter inlets shall conform to the contour and profile of the concrete curb and gutter. Grates shall be heavy duty and bicycle safe and shall withstand H20 loading.

F. Cast Iron Manhole Steps

Provide cast, manufactured manhole steps with cross-hatched treads and with anchor configuration appropriate for cast-in-place concrete or precast concrete as indicated. Provide steps for installation 16 inches on center in vertical alignment.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL

Page 189: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 05 16 January 19, 2015 Utility Structures Page 5

A. Requirements

Provide channel inserts, pulling eyes, ladders, and electrical grounding rods for electrical manholes and pull boxes as indicated.

B. Steel Materials

Standard structural sections, shapes, plates, bars, and rods, as indicated, conforming with ASTM A36/A36M. Bars conforming with ASTM 108 will be acceptable.

C. Anchors and Bolts

ASTM A 307, A449, A563, and F436, as applicable. Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

D. Ladders

Provide standard manufactured or custom fabricated steel ladders as required to meet the conditions indicated. Steel ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Grounding and Bonding Materials

Conform with UL 467 and the following requirements: 1. Grounding Rods: Medium carbon steel core, copper-clad by the molten weld

casting process, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long size. 2. Bare Conductors: ASTM B3, No. 1/0 AWG, Class B stranded, annealed copper

conductor. F. Fabrication

Form and fabricate the work as indicated. Include anchors, fasteners, and accessories to anchor and secure the work in place.

G. Galvanizing

All items shall be galvanized after fabrication by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123. Weight of the zinc coating shall conform with the requirements specified under “Weight of Coating” in ASTM A123.

2.5 MORTAR

A. Cement mortar for the sealing of openings for pipe penetrations, for cementing of joints of component parts of precast structures, for providing of flow characteristics for the bottoms of drainage structures, and other features as indicated shall conform with the California Building Code, Chapter 21, Type S (without Lime), with a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 1,800 psi.

B. Mortar shall comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C270, including

measurement, mixing, proportioning and water retention. Ten percent by volume of the

Page 190: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 05 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Utility Structures January 19, 2015 Page 6

cement content of the mortar shall be fly ash or pozzolanic material confirming with ASTM C618.

C. Use mortar within 90 minutes after mixing. Discard mortar which has been mixed longer

or which has begun to set. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.

END OF SECTION

Page 191: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 11 16 January 19, 2015 Site Water Distribution System Page 1

SECTION 33 11 16

SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for providing water service and distribution and modification to existing campus mains and services as indicated. The extent of water distribution is indicated on the Contract Drawings and includes furnishing, installing, testing, and disinfecting permanent water supply piping and services as indicated.

B. Provide fire hydrants and services as indicated. C. The jurisdictional water utility district shall provide water services to the water meters’

points of connection for station facilities and landscape irrigation systems, and modifications to their existing water mains, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all such arrangements. All work on the jurisdictional agency’s facilities shall be in accordance with the agency’s adopted standards and performed by the agency or their representative.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 23 00 - Trenching and Backfilling

B. Section 32 80 00 - Irrigation 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM A36/ Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel A36M

ASTM A126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe

Fittings

ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc Coated (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A197 Specifications for Cupola Malleable Iron

ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile

Strength

ASTM C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

Page 192: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 11 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Site Water Distribution System January 19, 2015 Page 2

ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping System

ASTM D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals

ASTM F439 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water

AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, three inches through 48 inches (75mm Through 1200mm), for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids

AWWA C503 Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants

AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains

AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, four inches-12 inches

AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 14 inches-48 inches

C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS)

MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves

D. Water Utility District Standards

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Requirements

Provide the types, sizes, and configurations of pipe, fittings, and miscellaneous materials and installation accessories as indicated.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Three Inches and Smaller

Page 193: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 11 16 January 19, 2015 Site Water Distribution System Page 3

1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1. 2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, socket weld, same material and schedule as pipe, or

meeting requirements of ASTM F439, as applicable. 3. Joints: Socket welded with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D564.

C. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Four Inches and Larger

1. Pipe: AWWA C900, SDR 18, Class 235 (AWWA C905, Class 235 for 14" and Larger) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe with bell and spigot ends and flexible ring joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, Type 1, Grade 1, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, Class 305, or meeting requirements or ASTM F439, as applicable.

3. Joints: ASTM D3139, gasketed bell joints with ASTM F477 gaskets.

D. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)

1. Piping: AWWA C151, thickness Class 50. 2. Fittings: AWWA C110. 3. Joints: Field Lok gaskets as manufactured by US Pipe, or equal, with copper

jumper to provide electrical continuity. Mechanical, where indicated, in accordance with AWWA C111, with copper jumper to provide electrical continuity.

4. Polyethylene encasement for protection of pipes, valves, and fittings shall be

furnished and installed in accordance with AWWA C105. 5. Provide inside pipe and fittings with 1/16 inch thick cement-mortar lining and an

asphaltic seal coat in accordance with AWWA C104.

2.2 VALVES

A. Gate Valves

150 pound bronze, non-rising stem, wedge disc, threaded connection, conforming with MSS SP-80. (AWWA C509 and AWWA C550)

B. Pressure Reducing Valves

All bronze construction, spring-loaded, single-seated, suitable for tight shutoff under dead-end conditions. Provide with renewable composition seat discs, nylon inserted diaphragm, bolted spring chamber, and threaded connection. (AWWA C512)

C. Backflow Preventer

Provide device which is approved by the jurisdictional water utility company. As a minimum, backflow preventer shall be a reduced pressure principle assembly with two rising stem gate shut-off valves, two resilient seat ball-valve test cocks, and two

Page 194: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 11 16 Lionakis No. 014145 Site Water Distribution System January 19, 2015 Page 4

replaceable resilient seat check valves. Backflow preventer shall be suitable for 175 psig operating pressure and 140 degrees F operating temperature and shall be of bronze construction with screwed inlet and outlet for three inch and smaller sizes and cast iron, epoxy coated construction with 150 pound flanged inlet and outlet for four inch and larger sizes. (AWWA C510 and C511)

2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Provide fire hydrants and related appurtenances as indicated. Fire hydrants shall comply with jurisdictional water utility district, as applicable.

B. Fire hydrants shall meet requirements of AWWA C503, as applicable, and shall be

provided with a minimum of two discharge nozzles and additional pumper connection, meeting the nozzle sizes and pumper requirements of the jurisdictional fire department.

2.4 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKS

A. Provide Class 3000, 3/4 inch aggregate, concrete for all thrust blocks, with reinforcement where indicated or required.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL

A. Tie Rods

Stainless Steel, Type 316, threaded ANSI standard bolt thread both ends, diameter as required.

B. Rod Couplings

Malleable iron, ASTM A197, turnbuckle design, female threaded to mate with tie rods, 5/8 inch sizes to mate with both rods and mechanical joint bolts.

C. Pipe Clamps

For sizes 4 inches and larger, provide with malleable iron rod sockets. Provide washers in lieu of rod sockets where authorized conforming with ASTM A126, Class A, cast iron. Bolts and bolting shall conform with ASTM A307.

D. Exposed Metal

All exposed metal (bends, bolts, glands, rings) shall be wrapped with six inch pipe wrap (tape coat HD 30).

E. Bolt and Nuts

All bolt and nuts shall be Stainless Steel, Type 316, unless noted otherwise.

END OF SECTION

Page 195: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 30 00 January 19, 2015 Site Sanitary Sewerage System Page 1

SECTION 33 30 00

SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for furnishing, installing, testing the site sanitary sewerage system in the ground and to a point outside the building wall as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling 1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping System ASTM D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals ASTM F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic

Pipe

B. Sanitary Utility District Standards

Note that all work shall be performed and completed in accordance with the jurisdictional sanitary utility district’s standard drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all such standards as applicable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Requirements

Provide the types, sizes, and configurations of pipe, fittings, and miscellaneous materials and installation accessories as indicated and required.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Three Inches and Smaller

Page 196: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 30 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Site Sanitary Sewerage System January 19, 2015 Page 2

1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1.

2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, socket weld, same material and schedule as pipe. 3. Joints: Socket welded with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D564.

C. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Four Inches and Larger

Pipe: ASTM D3034 (SDR 26), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe with bell and spigot ends and flexible ring joints.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. At grade, cleanouts shall have adjustable sleeve-type housing, threaded brass plug with countersunk slot, and cast iron frame and cover.

END OF SECTION

Page 197: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

Lionakis No. 014145 33 40 00 January 19, 2015 Site Drainage System Page 1

SECTION 33 40 00

SITE DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Specifications for site and subdrainage and area runoff collection system and connection to existing storm drainage system as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling B. Section 33 05 00 - Utility Structures

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

AASHTO Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe M252M

AASHTO Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300 1200 mm M294M

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM F667 Standard Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated

Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F405 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings

ASTM C76 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and

Sewer Pipe ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds

and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Piping System

C. Caltrans Standard Specifications - Latest Edition

Page 198: Outline Specifications, January 19, 2015

33 40 00 Lionakis No. 014145 Site Drainage System January 19, 2015 Page 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pipe Connection Requirements

Ends of pipe shall be bell and spigot, except PVC Perp., to assure continuous alignment of pipe and leakproof joints.

B. PVC Pipe (PVC): Pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, SDR 26, Bell and Spigot rubber joints for pipe sizes 4" through 8".

C. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)

Pipe: HDPE pipe conforming to ASTM D3212, or ASTM 1417 for pipe sizes four inch - 60 inch (ADS N-12 1B WT pipe or equivalent)

D. PVC Perforated Pipe (PVC Perp)

Pipe: PVC Perforated Pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, SDR 35, solvent weld joints for pipe sizes 4”, 6” and 8”. Perforations shall be 2 rows of ½” holes on 5” centers, 120° apart.

END OF SECTION